Author: Nik Ranger

Best JAK-12 Warzone loadout to get overpowered range on new shotgun Activision / Infinity WardInfinity Ward has just added the JAK-12 shotgun to Modern Warfare’s ever-growing weapon roster, based heavily on the AA-12 from MW2. The newly released gun is already wreaking havoc across Verdansk with insane range. Here’s how you can utilize this overpowered shotgun with our loadout guide. The AA-12 dominated players back in Modern Warfare 2, so it makes sense that this iconic shotgun is making such a splash in Warzone. While many fans were pleased to see the Origin 12 nerfed at the start of Season 6, it now looks like the JAK-12 has taken its place. Not only does this deadly shotgun absolutely shred opponents in close-quarters fights, but it can also melt your foes at range when kitted out with the right attachments. For now, it looks like the Warzone players will have to contend with another broken shotgun dominating the current meta. However, if you wish to cash in on the action and get some easy kills before the Activision nerfs hit, then be sure to use this JAK-12 loadout to get that competitive edge. Best JAK-12 Warzone loadout FORGE TAC MARAUDER – ZLR J-3600 TORRENT – 5mW Laser – Merc Foregrip – 8 Round FRAG-12 MAGS – IceManIsaac’s JAK-12 loadout is all about maxing out the shotgun’s range, allowing you to take out squads in close to mid-range firefights. In fact, this gun is capable of rivaling some of the game’s most potent assault rifles. While IceMan’s build features a red dot sight, we found the gun’s standard iron sights are clean enough to easily spot targets. Of course, you can always run a sight should you wish to add a little more ranged precision to your build. Both the FORGE TAC MARAUDER and ZLR J-3600 TORRENT tighten the pellet spread and drastically enhance your damage range. As a result, these two attachments are a must for those looking to effortlessly snipe their targets with deadly explosive rounds. And they call this thing a shotgun by the way 👀 pic.twitter.com/beyHouxZ6I — Isaac (@IceManIsaac) October 14, 2020 Meanwhile, the 5mW Laser helps with mobility and hip-fire accuracy, allowing you to remain competitive in those close-quarter situations. In order to speed up the ADS time and further reduce recoil, IceManIsaac has slapped on a Merc Foregrip. This helps to speed up target acquisition, giving you plenty of opportunities to barrage your foes with game-winning explosive pellets. Rounding things off are the 8 Round FRAG-12 MAGS. These explosives rounds are arguably the JAK-12’s most exciting feature. While the 8-R Dragon Breath Rounds absolutely melt people in more intimate engagements, the frag rounds really take the crown for the amount of damage they dish out. In fact, IceMan demonstrated just how absurd they are when he took down an armored player in just four hits. If this loadout’s incredible damage profile wasn’t enough, the 8 Round FRAG-12 MAGS allow you to completely bypass the game’s trophy systems. Not only can you snipe players across the map, but you can effortlessly clear out pesky campers, and even destroy vehicles in record time. It’s certainly not hard to see why the JAK-12 has both competitive and casual Warzone players worried, so make sure you capitalize on this OP loadout before Activision takes action. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, check out our full list of best loadouts for every gun.

Best Jackal PDW loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoDespite getting nerfed, the Jackal PDW still sits comfortably as one of the best SMGs in Black Ops 6, and one of the title’s best overall weapons. No weapon was used more than the Jackal PDW during Black Ops 6’s first beta weekend, as it outperformed every available SMG and AR in short and medium-range engagements. Treyarch responded by increasing the Jackal PDW’s damage falloff and adding more recoil to deal with. As a result, the weapon takes seven shots and 6 shots to kill enemies in gunfights between 25 and 30 meters or further. Previously, it only took five shots from that distance. However, this update only impacts the maximum damage range. None of the Jackal PDW’s near values were touched, meaning this SMG still shreds up close. Best Black Ops 6 Jackal PDW loadout Muzzle: Ported Compensator – Barrel: Reinforced Barrel – Underbarrel: Ranger Foregrip – Rear Grip: Ergonomic Grip – Stock: Balanced Stock – Our loadout focuses on giving a much-needed helping hand to accuracy while also making this one of the fastest builds in the game. First, The Ported Compensator reduces the first shot recoil and overall vertical recoil. Similarly, the Ranger Foregrip improves horizontal recoil sprinting and movement speed. Since the Jackal PDW does less damage at range, the Reinforced Barrel improves damage range and bullet velocity to recoup some losses. To improve mobility, the Ergonomic Grip improves aim down sight, sprint to fire, and dive to fire speed. Rounding out our loadout, the Balanced Stock provides moderate improvements to aim walking and overall movement speed. Jackal PDW pros and cons Where is the C9 in the Black Ops 6 meta? The nerf had little impact on overall popularity. Coming in with a 10.35% pick rate, the Jackal PDW is still the third most popular weapon in Black Ops 6, according to WZ Stats. And it isn’t too far from the top spot, as the Tanto .22 only boasts a 10.97% pick rate. All three beta SMGs are in the top four for popular weapons, so it’s hard to argue against using any of them. Before and after this update, the C9 performs better than the JAKAL PDW in close-range engagements, but if you are an aggressive player, you will still have more fun using the JAKAL because of better mobility and handling stats. This is all subject to change when the title officially launches, but this SMG is still in an excellent spot to be a meta weapon. Best Jackal PDW Perks, Equipment & Class Specialty Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Gung-Ho – Perk 3: Double Time – Perk 4: Dexterity – Combat Speciality: Recon – Wildcard: Perk Greed – Lethal: Thermo Grenade – Tactical: Concussion – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – For our Perk selections, we focused on highlighting the Jackal PDW’s exception mobility and handling. This loadout shines brightest while moving and on long flank routes. Every SMG loadout should have the Enforcer Combat Speciality, activated by equipping three Enforcer Perks. Enforcer grants a temporary buff to movement speed and health regeneration after every kill, which is a massive boost for this mobile build. Perk Greed also helps make this all possible by granting an extra Perk slot. Before getting into our red Perks, Ghost also helps improve stealth by taking you off the mini-map for radar pings and UAVs. Meanwhile, Double Time and Gung-Ho provide a phenomenal one-two punch as one increases tactical sprint duration while the other makes it possible to reload during a tactical sprint. As mentioned, the Ergonomic Grip improves dive-to-fire speed. That works hand-in-hand with Dexterity, which reduces weapon motion while sliding, jumping, and diving, meaning you can shoot while doing these actions more efficiently. To round out our loadout, Concussion and Semtex grenades are perfect for dealing with enemies that you are flanking. For objective game modes, a Trophy System blocks all incoming grenade spam while holding the point. How to unlock Jackal PDW in Black Ops 6 beta To unlock the Jackal PDW in the Black Ops 6 beta, you must hit level 10. This shouldn’t be too difficult to ask, as there is Double XP throughout the beta. Black Ops 6 Jackal PDW alternatives If the Jackal PDW doesn’t check every box for you, the C9 and Tanto .22 provide unique pace changes. To start, the C9 is a well-balanced weapon that does just about everything well without necessarily blowing anyone away. On the other hand, the Tanto .22 is a slow-firing SMG with a devastating damage profile in medium-range engagements. For more on other possible alternatives, check out our Black Ops 6 weapon tier list.

Best Itra Burst Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best Itra Burst Warzone loadout can have you topping the scoreboards across any playlist and we’ve put together the strongest Attachments and Perks needed for the burst-fire weapon to thrive in Season 1. Burst-fire guns once reigned supreme in Warzone. While they’re not quite dominant just yet, the Itra Burst is well on its way to becoming a staple Assault Rifle in Caldera. Whether you’re running it as a more agile SMG-esque build, or sticking to a long-range Tactical Rifle-style, the gun packs a punch. With the right set of Attachments, some handy Equipment, and the best Perks, the Itra Burst can truly shine as Warzone’s top burst-rifle today. Below is a full breakdown so you can craft the strongest Itra Burst loadout possible. Contents Best Itra Burst Warzone loadout – Best Itra Burst setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Itra Burst in Warzone – Alternatives to Itra Burst Warzone loadout – Best Itra Burst Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Botti 300mm CXII – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: Perfetto Padded Grip – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: 8mm Klauser 32 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Vital – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – The Itra Burst is one of Vanguard’s more versatile guns in Warzone. Though it functions best when you build towards a single goal. So here, we’ve focused on improving both accuracy and speed across the board. Kicking things off is the Recoil Booster Muzzle, an essential pick to help boost your fire rate. Shortening the gap between bursts is key so that you’re always firing your next rounds as soon as possible. Next comes the Botti 300mm CXII Barrel to buff not only your accuracy, but bullet velocity too. Velocity is a stat that can never be overlooked in Warzone and that’s no different here with the Itra Burst. When it comes to picking a sight, it’s really down to personal preference. Though we’ve settled on the G16 2.5x Optic for a few reasons. Adding an extra level of zoom helps with longer-range fights, but this particular scope also improves your recoil control in the process. Similar can be said for the Perfetto Padded Grip Stock, another handy attachment to keep your aim on point. You’ll need a few bursts to take down a target, so using this Stock to minimize flinch is vital. While accuracy is king, mobility also plays a big role in every gunfight. That’s where the Mark VI Skeletal Underbarrel comes in to boost ADS speed. It’s no good having a powerful AR if you’re slow to draw the gun in every engagement. Most Itra Burst magazines come with too many downsides, however, the 8mm Klauser 32 Round Drums are an exception. These provide a bigger mag size without any significant negatives attached. Rounding it all out we have the Lengthened Ammo Type to once again improve bullet velocity, along with the Polymer Grip Rear Grip to outright negate any type of flinch. But perhaps the most important pick in the entire build is running Vital in the Perk 1 slot. Increasing damage is insanely powerful, meaning your Itra Burst can often two-shot targets from the right distance. As the final Perk, you can’t go wrong with Fully Loaded to keep your ammo supply in check. Best Itra Burst Warzone setup (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Combat Scout (see folks through bushes) – Secondary: MP40 (for close-range fights) – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Sticking to the usual batch of equipment, this Itra Burst loadout in Warzone features both EOD and Overkill. Unlike most builds, however, we’ve opted to use Combat Scout in the third Perk slot instead. There’s one key reason for this: Caldera’s layout. With trees and bushes across the entire map, it’s easy to lose track of any given target. With Combat Scout equipped, landing one burst into an enemy will keep them outlined for a few seconds. No matter where they run to, you’ll be able to keep them in your sights. In terms of Lethals and Tacticals, you can’t go wrong with the Frag Grenade and Stims respectively. The latter has seen a huge rise in popularity since Caldera dropped, as new buffs provide speed boosts on top of the health regen. Read More: The Ultimate Warzone tier list – Using these at the right moments can easily help win your gunfight, especially when all it takes is one or two well-timed bursts from the Itra AR. How to unlock the Itra Burst in Warzone Unlocking the Itra Burst in Warzone requires you to reach level 16. This should barely take a few hours of gameplay across any mode. Obviously, the process can go even faster with Double XP in effect. Take advantage of contracts, maybe even drop into a few games of Plunder, and you’ll be well on your way to clearing level 16 in no time. Alternatives to the Itra Burst Warzone loadout If burst-fire isn’t working for you, a fully automatic Assault Rifle should be your next option. We recommend the BAR as a solid backup plan for the Itra Burst. Not only can it match the damage output, but you’ll feel right at home with its long-range potential as well. Read More: Best Warzone landing spots in Caldera – Using our ultimate BAR Warzone loadout, you’ll have the most well-rounded build possible. Whether you’re dropping into Caldera or Rebirth Island, the powerful AR will keep you one step ahead of the competition. So that’s our full rundown on the best Itra Burst class in Warzone today. While it’s viable across every playlist for now, balance updates are sure to keep the AR on the move in weeks to come. Be sure to check back after every big patch as we’ll keep this loadout guide updated to reflect all the latest buffs and nerfs. In the meantime, check out some other popular Warzone loadouts below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Top class setups and best weapons | 10 best Warzone players | Automaton loadout | MP40 loadout

Best Itra Burst Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe Itra Burst is a powerful Assault Rifle in CoD Vanguard capable of knocking foes down with a single well-placed shot. Here’s an optimal loadout build to help you get the most out of this deadly burst-fire weapon. Unlike most Assault Rifles in Vanguard, the Itra Burst isn’t full-auto as the name implies. Rather than holding down the trigger, this burst-rifle fires three shots at once, meaning precision and timing are key. While burst-fire weapons are often overlooked in CoD, the Itra Burst is no slouch. Just a single shot can take down targets from mid to long-range, and it’s even more lethal with the right attachments equipped. Here’s the best Itra Burst build to make this unique burst-rifle one of the most feared Assault Rifles in Vanguard. Best Itra Burst Vanguard loadout Attachments Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Botti 300MM CXII – Optic: MK 18 Sunfilter – Stock: Perfetto Padded Grip – Underbarrel: SMLE Pistol Grip – Magazine: 8MM Jaeger 32 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Vital – Kit: On-Hand – Without any upgrades equipped, the Itra Burst has some noticeable downsides. Its ADS speed is fairly slow, as is the overall rate of fire. With damage already quite high, these are the key areas you want to focus on improving with the right build. With that in mind, the Recoil Booster Muzzle is first on the list. The name is a little inaccurate here as this attachment actually improves your fire rate instead. While it does come with some negative effects, this Muzzle only impacts horizontal recoil, not vertical, so your shots will still be mostly on point. Next is the Botti 300MM CXII Barrel, an attachment that appears to be outright broken at this stage. Not only does it provide a huge 40% improvement to recoil control, but it also comes with an absurd 1591.9% boost to damage range. Simply put, this attachment is a must-pick and will ensure you delete enemies at medium to long-range. When it comes to choosing an Optic, it’s purely down to personal preference here. If your playstyle is more aggressive, quick and easy scopes are ideal. If you prefer to sit back and play patient, longer-range scopes are for you. We’ve gone with the MK 18 Sunfilter as a middle-of-the-road option to give a slight zoom without any negative effects. As one of the more significant attachments in this build, the Perfetto Padded Grip Stock comes with some major positives and negatives. On one hand, it provides huge recoil boosts, keeping your bursts as accurate as possible. On the other, it comes with a big hit to your sprint to fire speed. That’s where the SMLE Pistol Grip Underbarrel comes in to counteract the Stock. While the previous attachment makes your sprint to fire speed 30% worse, this Underbarrel brings it back to just 10% slower than default. This gives you the most precise loadout possible, with just a small downside to mobility. In terms of Magazines, there isn’t a clear standout option for the Itra Burst. Most come with severe negative effects that can’t be justified. As a result, the 8MM Jaeger 32 Round Drums are the only viable option, providing a small bump in mag size, with only half a second added to your reload time. Making your shots all the more powerful, the Lengthened Ammo Type is another must-pick attachment for the Itra Burst. Bullet velocity is always important and this option provides a massive boost to the stat. Next up is the Stippled Grip Reap Grip for further recoil control. This attachment keeps your initial shots on target, making each burst that much more accurate and allowing you to one-shot enemies at medium range. Last but not least come the weapon perks in Proficiency and Kit. For the former, Vital is just too powerful to ignore. By expanding critical hitboxes, you can effectively one-burst enemies even when aiming for the chest. Read More: Best MP40 Vanguard class loadout – Moreover, the On-Hand Kit provides a slight buff to mobility, letting you recover from equipment usage even quicker than usual. Best Itra Burst Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – When it comes to building the rest of your Itra Burst loadout, selecting the appropriate Perks, Equipment, and Field Upgrades are all essential as well. As with just about any Assault Rifle class, Ghost, Radar, and Double Time are among the obvious picks. Staying off enemy minimaps while gaining as much intel as possible will help tally up the kills. As for Double Time, getting out of spawn and into the action as soon as you can is always handy. You likely won’t be using your secondary all too often, but having a fully automatic weapon on standby definitely helps. That’s why we’ve settled on the Machine Pistol as a last resort for close-range fights if your magazine runs dry. For Equipment, the standard MK2 Frag Grenade is effective no matter what situation you’re in. Similarly, Stim is crucial in Vanguard to keep you on your feet. After taking damage, Stim will get you right back in the fight with full health and Tac Sprint. Wrapping up the build is the Armor Field Upgrade that just can’t be overlooked for any build in Vanguard. Adding to your overall health is simply too powerful and thus, another must-pick in this loadout. So there you have it, our optimal Itra Burst loadout in Vanguard. With this setup, you should be one-bursting from just about any range with near-perfect accuracy. With this build coming from the recent CoD Vanguard Beta, there’s every chance things change ahead of launch. So be sure to check back as we’ll keep this loadout guide updated to reflect all the latest buffs and nerfs in Vanguard.

Best ISO loadout for Warzone and Modern Warfare ActivisionOptimizing your weapon for both Modern Warfare and Warzone is critical, so let’s delve into the exact attachments you’ll need to have the best ISO loadout. There has never been a system that offers more weapon customization in a Call of Duty game than the Gunsmith. With a plethora of attachments available for every weapon, the Gunsmith allows you to fine-tune your gun. Although, when priming your weapon for battle, you’ll often find yourself dabbling with a variety of attachments and debating which is the right fit. We’ve cut out the middleman and sourced the best ISO loadout for you to rock in both Modern Warfare’s fast-paced multiplayer and Warzone’s tactical battle royale. Best ISO loadout for Warzone Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor. – Barrel: FSS Revolution Barrel. – Laser: Tac Laser. – Underbarrel: Ranger Foregrip. – Ammunition: 50 Round Drum. – In Verdansk, you’ll want to be proficient at both short and long-range, so aim stability and consistency is key. Luckily, the ISO without any attachments boasts a relatively consistent recoil. But with the right attachments, this can be mitigated a lot more. Combining the FSS Revolution Barrel and Tac Laser will reduce any weapon sway while aiming down sight, while the Monolithic Suppressor and Ranger Foregrip will drastically improve both accuracy and control at range. If you’re wanting to be a little more light on your feet, swapping the Underbarrel for the Merc Foregrip wouldn’t affect the class too much. For Warzone, it’s essential to have the 50-Round Drum magazine equipped. Without it, you’ll find yourself having to reload mid-gunfight, which is often the difference between life and death. But if you don’t want to pay the penalty for the reduced mobility and aim down sight speed, you could always swap this out for Sleight of Hand. Best ISO loadout for Modern Warfare Barrel: FFS Nightshade. – Laser: Tac Laser. – Stock: ISO Collapsible. – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip. – Ammunition: 50 Round Drums. – Moving over to multiplayer, you’ll want to cater your class more to give you the edge up close. The only essential attachment to make it over from the Warzone class here is the Tac Laser. Everything else has been swapped to provide a little more mobility in exchange for some precision at range. Applying the FFS Nightshade Barrel simultaneously provides sound suppression as well as improving aim stability, while opening up an additional attachment slot for the ISO Collapsible Stock — making you much more nimble and quicker on your feet. The 50-Round Drum is recommended for smaller maps, where reload time can often prove to be a nuisance. But swapping this out for the 30-Round mag is also feasible, depending on the game mode in question. Overall, the ISO offers a modest fire rate for an SMG with a slow time-to-kill relative to other weapons in its class. While it might not be the most lethal weapon on paper, adding the above attachments might just be a game changer. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, check out our full list of best loadouts for every gun.

Best ISO Hemlock Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisonISO Hemlock is a Warzone 2 AR that has been through a vast amount of changes and it’s definitely not the king of the meta anymore, so in order to maximize its damage, we’ve put together the best ISO Hemlock loadout for you to use on Al Mazrah in Warzone 2. When it comes to ARs in Warzone 2, the meta is extremely competitive with the likes of the TAQ-56, Chimera, Kastov 762, and Kastov-74u all fighting for the top spots. The ISO Hemlock was the standout pick in Season 2 Reloaded which sadly made it a prime candidate for a nerf in Season 3. The knee-jerk reaction was to abandon the AR and search for an alternative, but players quickly realized that the Hemlock is still powerful, so the player base came back to it. Equipped with a devastating mid-range TTK and a manageable recoil pattern, it’s perfect for racking up kills on Al Mazrah. Over the past few weeks, the gun has dominated the meta. Of course, to push its power to the limits, you’ll need the best ISO Hemlock loadout and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best ISO Hemlock Warzone 2 loadout – Best ISO Hemlock Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the ISO Hemlock in Warzone 2 – Best ISO Hemlock alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best ISO Hemlock Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Harbinger D20 – Barrel: Fielder-T50 – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Magazine: 45-Round Mag – Optic: Aim OP-V4 – Our ISO Hemlock loadout in Warzone 2 is focused on dominating at mid-range. To achieve this, you’ll want to equip the Harbinger D20 muzzle to enhance recoil control and the Fielder-T50 to increase bullet velocity and damage range. Following this, make sure to use the FTAC Ripper 56 underbarrel to bolster the AR’s kickback even more. This added stability makes it simple to land all your shots, and maximize the Hemlock’s TTK. Next, you’ll need a top-tier optic and the Aim OP-V4 is the number one choice for mid-range engagements. Finally, round off the loadout with the 45-Round mag to ensure you never run out of bullets and can take out multiple opponents without having to reload. Best ISO Hemlock Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenade – When it comes to perks we recommend Using Overkill and equipping an SMG as your secondary. The ISO Hemlock dominates at medium range, but it is no match for SMGs at close quarters. Strong Arm is a useful Perk that allows you to toss equipment longer distances and makes sure your throwables hit exactly what you’re aiming for. Spotter allows you to identify field upgrades, opponent’s equipment, and kill streaks through the terrain, which will be very helpful when dealing with campers. Finally, Survivor pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. For your Lethal and Tactical, a Grenade is perfect for flushing enemies out of cover, and a Flash Grenade is ideal for aggressive pushes. How to unlock the ISO Hemlock in Warzone 2 If you’re looking to unlock the ISO Hemlock in Warzone 2, there are no challenges to complete. Instead, you just have to progress the Season 2 Battle Pass. The AR can be found in Sector B11 so just keep playing matches and performing well, and you’ll have it unlocked in no time. Best ISO Hemlock alternatives in Warzone 2 If the ISO Hemlock isn’t doesn’t fit your style of play, consider checking out the M4 in Warzone 2. This trusty AR is a classic weapon in the Call of Duty franchise and can always be relied upon to perform. With a solid TTK, low recoil, and impressive mobility, it’s a well-balanced gun that’s ideal for racking up kills. Of course, you’ll need a meta loadout for the weapon and luckily, we’ve got a dedicated Warzone 2 M4 loadout guide. That’s all for our ISO Hemlock loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best ISO Hemlock Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionISO Hemlock still is among Modern Warfare 2‘s best assault rifles going into Season 3 Reloaded thanks to its great TTK and low recoil. So here’s our best meta loadout for the ISO Hemlock in Season 3 Reloaded of Modern Warfare 2 complete with the best attachments and perks. The ISO Hemlock is one of the most lethal picks in Modern Warfare 2 Season 3 Reloaded and it holds a mind-blowing pick rate. The AR class is competitive in both MW2 and Warzone 2 this year but the ISO Hemlock has established itself as one of the best options in the current meta. MW2 expert WhosImmortal has even labeled the weapon as the strongest pick for multiplayer, so it’s well worth using if you’re looking to dominate your foes. So, to make things easier for you in the game here’s our best ISO Hemlock loadout for you to use in Modern Warfare 2 Contents Best ISO Hemlock Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best ISO Hemlock Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the ISO Hemlock in Modern Warfare 2 – Best ISO Hemlock alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best ISO Hemlock Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: Fielder-T50 – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Res-2 – Rear Grip: XTEN Grip – Kicking off our best ISO Hemlock Modern Warfare 2 loadout, we’ve gone for the Fielder-T50 Barrel due to several big upgrades including a nice boost to hip fire accuracy. It will also be no surprise to MW2 players that we’ve opted for the FSS OLE-V Laser as it’s just amazing and offers multiple top-quality boosts. Optics can be down to preference, but it’s gradually become accepted that the Cronen Mini Pro is just a great go-to for most, if not all, guns. Also, the Res-2 Stock is also ideal for gaining more all-around speed to aid your mobility around every map. To finish off the loadout, we’ve opted for the XTEN Grip for extra speed for your Operator, crucially, Aim Down Sight speed. Best ISO Hemlock Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Flash Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Tracker is a cheat code at times as you can literally follow a trail from a player that has run by you recently, and Battle Hardened is essential for coping with Flash Grenades. Our bonus Perk is Fast Hands because you can reload much quicker and rotate to your secondary much faster – and it’s incredibly useful. High Alert is a no-brainer for the Ultimate Perk as it gives you a vital second or two to react when you’ve been spotted by an enemy player. For Equipment, Flash Grenades will blind your opponents for what feels like forever and a Stim gets you back into the action. How to unlock the ISO Hemlock in Modern Warfare 2 To unlock the ISO Hemlock Assault Rifle to your loadout in the first place, you will need to reach Sector B11 in the Modern Warfare 2 Season 2 Battle Pass. The Battle Pass has undergone some changes in the latest round of Call of Duty titles, and reaching Sector B11 shouldn’t take too long to reach. Best ISO Hemlock alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 If you do unlock the ISO Hemlock, give it a whirl, and decide it’s not for you, then there are plenty of fun options for you to consider including the consistent TAQ-56 AR, and the devastating Fennec SMG to switch things up. That wraps up our Modern Warfare 2 loadout guide for the Hemlock, so check out some of our other content we have for the game: Modern Warfare 2 weapon | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons | Can you play Modern Warfare 2 on Steam Deck? | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best Kastov 762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout | Best Expedite 12 Modern Warfare 2 loadout | Best M4 Modern Warfare 2 loadout | Best Vaznev-9k Modern Warfare 2 loadout

Best ISO 9mm Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionSeason 6 introduces a brand new SMG into the mix, and a fast-fire rate, quick mobility, and devastating TTK make the ISO 9mm a compelling new option to add to your rotation. Here is everything you need to know about maximizing the ISO 9mm’s untapped potential. In what may surprise many, the Lachmann Sub and ISO 45 SMGS dodged nerfs in Season 6 despite dominating Warzone popularity rankings. Instead, the devs adjusted Warzone’s close-range meta by bringing other SMGs more in line with the game’s cream of the crop. As a result, the BAS-P, Fennec 45, Lachmann Shroud, Minibak, and MX9 all saw much-needed buffs to make them more viable. The devs also introduced the ISO 9mm, which has endless potential to shake up the battle royale’s SMG class. Let’s jump into the best way to customize Warzone’s latest short-range option. Contents Best ISO 9mm Warzone loadout – Best ISO 9mm Warzone class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the ISO 9mm in Warzone – Best ISO 9mm alternatives in Warzone – Best ISO 9mm Warzone loadout Laser: 1mw Quick Fire Laser (-0.27, -31.26) – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Demo Fade Tac (-0.77, -1.47) – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Ammunition: 9mm Hollow Point (+0.50, +6.10) – Activision explained: “This weapon favors speed over long-range lethality, so do what it takes to get up close and on target fast.” So don’t extend the ISO 9mm’s range too much, as this SMG thrives up close and personal. We recommend equipping a 50-round drum to pair with a laser to spray and pray multiple enemies at once. The ISO 9mm’s iron sights aren’t the easiest to use, so the Cronen Mini Pro makes getting a clearer line of view on enemies easier. Best ISO 9mm Warzone class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – For Base Perks, Double Time is useful as it doubles your tactical sprint duration, making getting around both Al Mazrah and Resurgence maps faster. We also recommend using Overkill to run a secondary that covers the ISO 9mm’s weaknesses like a meta AR. Resupply is an effective Bonus Perk as it constantly regenerates both Equipment slots and Field Upgrade. Given the importance of equipment for pushing other teams and maneuvering having constant access to them is fantastic. For the Ultimate Perk, High Alert is a superb choice as it provides free intel by highlighting the direction of enemy players aiming at you from behind. With Warzone 2’s short TTK, this is one of the few ways to give yourself enough time to react before being downed. Equipment is flexible as there are several strong choices but a Drill Charge and Smoke Grenade are the top picks here. Drill Charges are excellent for flushing out players from hard-to-reach areas while Smoke Grenades allow you to reposition through open spaces without being punished. How to unlock ISO 9mm in Warzone & Modern Warfare Season 6 Players can unlock the ISO 9mm in Warzone and Modern Warfare 2 Season 6 by completing the free Sector F4 of the Season 6 Battle Pass. Best ISO 9mm alternatives in Warzone If you are a fan of fast-firing mobile SMGs we recommend giving the ISO 45 a try. Alternatively, the Lachmann Sub still reigns supreme as the most popular short-range meta weapon in Warzone. That’s all for our ISO 9mm loadout! For more of our Warzone coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best ISO 9mm Modern Warfare 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup The ISO 9mm has arrived giving MW2 players another SMG to take into their games, and it’s certainly a competitive choice. To help you make the most of this new addition we’ve put together the best ISO 9mm loadout in Modern Warfare 2 multiplayer. Modern Warfare 2 Season 6 has introduced two new guns, the ISO 9mm & TR-76 Geist. This former of the two is a close-range submachine gun inspired by the real-world APC9. This new gun is effectively a lower-caliber version of the existing ISO 45. It trades some of the 45’s raw firepower for increased mobility and handling. It’s the ideal choice for an aggressive run-and-gun playstyle on smaller maps. To get the most out of the ISO 9mm you’ll need the best Modern Warfare 2 loadout possible for multiplayer, and we’ve got you covered. Contents Best ISO 9mm MW2 loadout – Best ISO 9mm MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the ISO 9mm in Modern Warfare 2 – Best ISO 9mm alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best ISO 9mm MW2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Lacerta Compensator – Laser: VLK LZR 7mW – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Demo Fade Tac – Rear Grip: EXP Shear – Much like its big brother, the ISO 9mm kicks considerably for a submachine gun. Reducing its recoil is a big priority and this is best done by using the Lacerta Compensator. This muzzle massively reduces this SMG’s side-to-side bounce and makes it much easier to control. Since the recoil-reducing muzzles negatively impact ADS it’s best to equip the EXP Shear and VLK LZR 7mW to keep the ISO feeling snappy. As an additional bonus, these also greatly improve sprint-to-fire speed which is fantastic for playing aggressively. Keeping with the theme of mobility and handling, the Demo Fade Tac is a strong option as it increases both Sprint Speed and Aim Walking Speed while using the ISO 9mm. It does reduce Aiming Stability somewhat but that isn’t overly important on an SMG. The last attachment slot is tweakable based on preference but there’s no harm in using a clear close-range optic like the Cronen Mini Pro. Alternatively, some MW2 players may prefer using the 9mm High Velocity ammunition type or 50 Round Drum to make the ISO more versatile. Best ISO 9mm MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Hardline – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Shock Stick – For Base Perks, Double Time has natural synergy with SMGs like the ISO 9mm as it lets you get around faster when moving through the map. Meanwhile, Bomb Squad is one of the few Perks that can directly save your life making it well worth using. Although it’s a less conventional choice, Hardline works well here as you are going to be getting into plenty of gunfights with this loadout. The cheaper killstreaks this Bonus Perk provides can easily tilt a game in your favor and leave the enemy team hopeless. As is almost always the case, Ghost is the best Ultimate Perk to use in MW2. Being able to stay off the radar during the inevitable UAV spam is a big deal and without it, you’ll have a tough time flanking anyone. A Frag Grenade is an excellent option for Lethal as it deals a lot of damage and can even be cooked to detonate with perfect timing. As for Tactical, a Shock Stick is an interesting option that can catch enemies off guard by forcing them to empty their magazine and let you push in for a free kill. How to unlock ISO 9mm in Modern Warfare 2 The ISO 9mm can be unlocked in MW2 by reaching and completing Sector F4 of the Season 6 Battle Pass. This requires a minimum of 20 Battle Pass Tokens starting from F1. Alternatively, Modern Warfare 2 players can obtain the ISO 9mm by successfully extracting it in any DMZ game. This can be done with any blueprint dropped by either an enemy player or teammate. Best ISO 9mm alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 The Fennec 45 is a direct competitor to the ISO 9mm and a top-tier option for dominating close-range engagements. Its raw DPS up close is hard to beat and it has remained a staple of the multiplayer meta since MW2’s launch. Alternatively, the Chimera performs somewhat similarly to the ISO, excelling up close while holding its own at medium range. They are both a handful to control but reward capable players with an extremely competitive TTK. That’s everything you need to know about the best ISO 9mm loadout in MW2 multiplayer. For more information on COD check out some of our other content: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty: Modern Warfare III — Everything we know | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best ISO 45 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionWarzone’s short-range meta is wide open in Season 5, but the ISO 45 outshines every other option. In order to maximize the new SMG’s potential, we’ve put together the best ISO 45 loadout in Warzone. Season 5 weapon balance changes did a lot and a little at the same time. Nerfs to the Cronen Squall opened the door for new contenders for the game’s long-range meta. And buffs to five SMGs blew Warzone 2’s short-range meta wide open. However, after a full week of adjusting to Season 5’s changes, the same few tried and true weapons were right back at the top of popularity rankings. The Cronen Squall, ISO 45, and Lachmann Sub all comfortably held onto their spots as top meta weapons. With the ISO 45 still standing out as a top-tier meta option, here is everything you need to know about the fast-fitting lightweight SMG. Contents Best ISO 45 Warzone loadout – Best ISO 45 Warzone class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the ISO 45 in Warzone 2 – Best ISO 45 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best ISO 45 Warzone loadout attachments Muzzle: Spiral V3.5 Flash Hider (-0.77, +0.28) – Laser: VLK LZR 7MW (-0.40, -39.48) – Stock: SK-3 Cheetah (-2.84, -1.70) – Rear Grip: EXP Shear (+0.73, -0.24) – Magazine: 45 Round Drum – The ISO 45 is a throwback to the ISO SMG from MW 2019. Infinity Ward confirmed the new SMG performs very closely to its original version, stating “its high-caliber rounds make it a heavy hitter compared to its fast-firing counterparts.” With that in mind, our loadout focuses on finding the perfect balance between mobility and recoil control. With these attachments, dominating short to mid-range engagements should be easy. Best ISO 45 Warzone class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing knife – Tactical Equipment: Smoke grenade – Double Time makes it easier to traverse freely, improving the duration of your tactical sprint. Within nine meters the ISO 45 shreds through enemies, but anything further and you may be in trouble. We recommend using Overkill to pair the SMG with a meta long-range weapon such as the TAQ V or Cronen Squall. Resupply will come in handy over the duration of a long Warzone 2 match, as you start with an additional Lethal and equipment recharges over 30 seconds. Finally, High Alert may save your life on one or two occasions, as vision pulses alert you when an enemy spots you. To round off the setup, we recommend using throwing knives to finish off downed enemies or take down multiple enemies at once without wasting ammo. And finally, smoke grenades are great for fleeing a gunfight or rotating in the final few circles. How to unlock the ISO 45 in Warzone 2 There are no challenges required to unlock the ISO 45. The only way to procure this high fire rate SMG is to unlock it via the Modern Warfare 2 and Warzone 2 Season 4 Battle Pass. If you’re wanting to plot out your path accordingly to acquire the weapon quicker, the ISO Hemlock can be found in Sector D19 and is a free unlock for all players. Best ISO 45 alternatives in Warzone 2 The biggest pitfall of the ISO 45 is its range. According to sym.gg, ISO 45 has the best time to kill among SMGS within nine meters. Anything past that range and other short-range meta options emerge as better choices. We recommend using the VEL 46 as an alternative because it offers more consistency. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out some of our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best ISO 45 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks The ISO 45 is a fully automatic submachine gun added in Modern Warfare 2 Season 4. If you’re looking for a top-tier setup to dominate with this SMG we’ve got just the thing, here’s our best ISO 45 loadout in MW2. Introduced in Season 4, the ISO 45 is a submachine gun based on the real-world B&T APC-45 PRO, a Swiss firearm making its debut in Call of Duty. Although similar this new SMG should not be confused with MW19’s Striker 45 or the original MW2’s iconic UMP-45. The ISO 45 is an SMG with a high fire rate and impressive stopping power. It’s a traditional submachine gun that excels at close range but can still hold its own at medium range. It compliments aggressive playstyles well and is statistically one of the best guns in its class. Here’s the best loadout for the ISO 45, including the attachments, perks, and equipment to use. Contents Best ISO 45 MW2 Loadout – Best ISO 45 MW2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the ISO 45 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best ISO 45 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best ISO 45 MW2 Loadout Attachments Muzzle: Lockshot KT85 – Laser: Accu-Shot 5mW Laser – Stock: Demo Fade Tac – Ammunition: .45 Auto Armor Piercing – Rear Grip: A30 Stout – Unusually for an SMG, the ISO 45 has a lot of vertical recoil which can make it hard to keep on target. To fix this it’s recommended to use both the Lockshot KT85 Muzzle and A30 Stout Rear Grip. Although our priority is improving vertical recoil, this combination does also reduce side-to-side bounce. With this being a submachine gun handling is extremely important. A slow SMG may as well not be an SMG at all. To keep its aim down sights time as fast as possible it’s best to use the Accu-Shot 5mW Laser. Those who don’t like playing with a visible laser should instead use the 1mW Quick Fire Laser. Another great attachment to use for weapon handling is the Demo Fade Tac Stock. This improves Aim Walking Speed and Sprint Speed with little downside. Increasing our Aim Walking Speed is especially useful as the strafe speeds in MW2 are on the slower side when compared to other CoD games. Finally, the .45 Auto Armor Piercing rounds are useful as they give the ISO 45 the ability to shoot through certain surfaces. If that’s not a priority then use a close-range optic of choice or even consider the surprisingly strong 12 Round Mag that converts the ISO 45 into a semi-auto weapon. Best ISO 45 MW2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Cold-Blooded – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Double Time is an amazing choice for the first Base Perk slot as it doubles the duration of Tactical Sprint. This lets you run faster for longer which is perfect on a close-range weapon as you’ll moving around the map constantly. To avoid getting caught out while moving Tracker is a great second Base Perk. It reveals the footprints of nearby enemies making it easier to figure out where they are when hunting them down. For the Bonus Perk, Cold-Blooded is fantastic as it hides you from appearing or being identified by enemy killstreaks. There’s nothing worse than having a good run ended due to an enemy VTOL or Chopper Gunner and Cold-Blooded is the best counter to that. It partners well with Ghost which is an Ultimate Perk that keeps you off enemy UAVs. It’s difficult to move around the map when enemies know where you are so this is a must for playing aggressively. For equipment, we recommended using the old-school combo of a Frag Grenade and a Flash Grenade. Frags are excellent as they can be cooked to explode so quickly that enemies can’t get avoid them while Flash Grenades blind opponents often handing you a free kill if utilized correctly. How to unlock the ISO 45 in Modern Warfare 2 The ISO 45 can be unlocked in Modern Warfare 2 by completing Sector D4 of the Season 4 Battle Pass. This requires a minimum of 15 Battle Pass tokens to reach and complete. Once Season 4 comes to a close the ISO 45 will be available through a future in-game challenge. Best ISO 45 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 The best alternative SMG to the ISO 45 is the Fennec 45. Both are fast-firing submachine guns that chamber .45 caliber rounds and have devastating TTKs up close. Those that enjoy using the ISO’s semi-auto setup should consider trying out the FTAC Recon which is another excellent semi-auto weapon that excels in close to medium-range gunfights. That’s all for our best ISO 45 loadout! For more of our MW2 & Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best MW2 weapons: Ultimate tier list | MW2 & Warzone 2 Season 4 Ranked Play rewards | How to unlock ISO 45 SMG | How to unlock Tempus Razorback | Weapon buffs & nerfs in MW2 and Warzone 2 Season 4 | Can you play Modern Warfare 2 on Steam Deck? | How many people play Warzone 2? Modern Warfare 2 player count | CDL 2023 season: Standings, schedule, teams, more

Best ICR-7 attachments and class setups to use in Black Ops 4 Multiplayer It’s no secret that the ICR-7 assault rifle is currently one of the best weapons to use in the Multiplayer of Call of Duty: Black Ops 4. The weapon can be made virtually unstoppable with the right combination of attachments. The available attachments for the ICR are Grip, FMJ, Quickdraw, Laser Sight, Grip II, and Long Barrel. Popular YouTuber ‘TheXclusiveAce,’ who is known for his Call of Duty weapon guide videos, has released an in-depth look at the ICR’s stats and how each available attachment changes its effectiveness. According to the video, the attachments that best maximize the ICR’s potential are Reflex sight, Grip I and II to virtually eliminate all recoil, FMJ, and Quickdraw. The YouTuber states that using Long Barrel and Laser Sight would be a waste of pick-10 class points since their effects are minimal compared to the base stats of the weapon. The video goes on to display which class setups TheXclusiveAce prefers to have when using the ICR. The first class has Reflex, Grip I and II, Quickdraw for the attachments, Stem Shot for the Gear, Scavenger, Lightweight, Dead Silence for the Perks, and Primary Gunfighter I for the Wildcard.

Best HRM-9 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks Ever since it was introduced in Warzone, the HRM-9 has been top-tier and that is continuing with Season 4 Reloaded. Here is the best HRM-9 loadout to use in Warzone to dominate close-range engagements. When the HRM-9 first arrived as part of the Season 1 Reloaded update, the gun quickly ascended the ranks of popularity, becoming many players’ top choice for the battlefield. That has largely remained true and is carrying on in Season 4 Reloaded where the weapon continues to be a solid option for close-range encounters. For those who want to test it, here is the best HRM-9 loadout to use in Warzone and outgun the opposition over and over with this incredible SMG. Contents Best HRM-9 Warzone loadout Muzzle: ZEHMN Compensated Flash Hider – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – Stock: Folding Stock – Ammunition: 9MM High Grain Rounds – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Being an SMG, using the HRM-9 should be all about speed and getting your shots off as easily as possible. So, having attachments like the ZEHMN Compensated Flash Hider and Folding Stock are going to give you increased ADS speed and reduce both vertical and horizontal recoil. In addition to that, the XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop will provide you with an increased movement speed to get around the battlefield much easier. There will be a slight hit to ADS Speed, but this will be made up for by other attachments. Using the 50 Round Drum will provide more rounds per clip, and also boost the ADS Speed even further. This will be bolstered with 9MM High Grain Rounds that will bump up your damage range and bullet velocity. HRM-9 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix inserting a plate or killing another player will trigger health regeneration – – Perk 4: Resolute move faster when hit by an enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – The use of Double Time is going to help with the mobility of this loadout, as it allows you to sprint faster, and for longer. You can use this to get around the battlefield and get proper positioning on your enemies when you need to, while also allowing you to escape the gas quicker. Being a mobile character, you will surely take some damage be it from other players or the environment, which is why Fast Hands and Quick Fix are on this list. The former will give you the chance to reload and get yourself resituated quicker, while the latter is going to keep you alive. Finally, Resolute keeps you alive by giving you a chance to reach cover when hit by enemy fire. How to unlock HRM-9 in Warzone The HRM-9 can be unlocked through the Armory by activating the SMG and then completing 3 Daily Challenges. Before Season 2, it was instead unlocked by completing Sector A21 of the Season 1 Battle Pass. Alternatively, you can find and extract it in Zombies to instantly unlock it. Best alternative to HRM-9 in Warzone The Striker 9 shares a lot in common with the HRM-9 with both being mobile SMGs that are best suited to close-range engagements but still perform well at medium-range where other submachine guns generally struggle to compete. With SMGs still staying at the top of the Warzone meta, learn what are some of the best options including the Superi 46, WSP-9, and Striker.

Best HRM-9 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks Although the HRM-9 has seen more use in Warzone than multiplayer, the SMG is still strong in Modern Warfare 3 and is well worth trying out. Here’s the definitive loadout to help you master the HRM-9 in MW3 Season 3. The HRM-9 was added in Season 1 Reloaded and immediately became one of the best weapons in Warzone. As for multiplayer, it hasn’t had quite the same impact but it is still a competitive option that can hold its own in just about any lobby. To help you get the most out of the HRM-9 we’ve put together this guide on the best loadout possible. That includes which attachments and perks you need to be using to make this SMG as effective as possible. Contents: Best HRM-9 loadout – Best HRM-9 Class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock HRM-9 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best alternative to HRM-9 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best HRM-9 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: Princeps Long Barrel – Stock: Folding Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Rear Grip: PCS-90 Assault Grip – The HRM-9’s biggest flaw is its recoil which is rather extreme for an SMG. This can greatly limit its damage range and make it nearly impossible to use on some maps. Thankfully, there are attachments that help fix this. Most notably, the Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider and Folding Stock provide a roughly combined 20% improvement to recoil control. This SMG can be made even more accurate with the PCS-90 Assault Grip which boosts this by a further 10%, albeit it at the cost of aim down sights speed. Something that helps the HRM-9 stand out amongst other SMGs is its ability to deal serious damage at medium range, and not just up close. This becomes even more true with the Princeps Long Barrel equipped which keeps the HRM-9 competiive all the way up to 38m. That’s assault rifle range but the HRM-9 has better mobility and handling than any AR. In saying that, these attachments do weigh down this loadout somewhat and the last thing you want is a sluggish SMG. Use the DR-6 Handstop to offset this as it improves several key mobility and handling stats including ADS Speed, Sprint To Fire Speed, and ADS Movement Speed. Best HRM-9 Class: Perks & Equipment Vest: Overkill Vest Allows for two primary weapons, increased weapon swap speed, and can reload while sprinting. – – Gloves: Assault Gloves While jumping, accuracy and time to ADS is improved. – – Boots: Lightweight Boots Running Sneakers – – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset Reduces player combat and environmental sounds to allow improved focus on hearing other footsteps. – – Lethal: Frag Grenade Cookable fragmentation grenade. – – Tactical: Flash Grenade Blinds and deafens targets. – – The Overkill Vest is a great choice as it lets you take a second primary weapon to covers the HRM-9’s weaknesses. We recommend either a sniper, marksman rifle, or assault rifle which can be used to challenge long sightlines where the HRM-9 isn’t quite as competitive.. To maximise mobility and make the most of the HRM-9 you’ll also want to use both the Assault Gloves and Running Sneakers. When combined these increase your tactical sprint and enhance jump shots, perfect for playing aggressively and pushing enemies more effectively. This is the preferred playstyle for the HRM-9, especially in multiplayer thanks to MW3’s fast paced gameplay. With no Covert Sneakers, Ghost T/V Camo, or a suppressor other players are going to know where you are and inevitably push you. Therefore it’s best to use the Bone Conduction Headset to increase awareness and reduce the likelihood of an enemy catching you off guard. Keep in mind though, this gear does not counter Covert Sneakers so you’ll still need to be aware of your surroundings. A Frag Grenade is always a strong choice in the lethal slot as it can be cooked to detonate at the perfect moment leaving opponents with no chance of escape. Equally, a Flash Grenade is another Call of Duty classic that blinds enemies making them easy to outgun. How to unlock HRM-9 in Modern Warfare 3 The HRM-9 is unlocked through the Armory first accessible from Level 25. After activating the HRM-9 in the Armory, complete 3 Daily Challenges or Win 3 Matches to obtain it. Alternatively, acquiring the HRM-9 and sucessfully extracting with it in MWZ will also unlock the SMG. Best alternative to HRM-9 in Modern Warfare 3 The Striker is a direct competitor to the HRM-9 with both being fast-firing SMGs that are strong up close yet still hold their own at medium range. The HRM-9 has more recoil but a better TTK whilst the Striker is easier to use but has a lower skill ceiling. For more top-tier classes like this HRM-9, check out these MW3 loadout guides: Best MW3 Guns: Ultimate Tier List | Best AMR9 loadout | Best WSP-9 loadout | Best Rival-9 loadout | Best WSP Swarm loadout

Best Holger 556 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more DexertoThe Holger 556 is a powerful assault rifle that has proven extremely popular in Warzone as of late, and with a meta loadout, it is easily one of the best weapons altogether. Based on the fan-favorite G36, the Holger 556 has long since wreaked havoc in multiplayer, but it’s no slouch in battle royale either. In fact, this iconic assault rifle has established itself as a top-tier option, especially in Solos and Duos, where its smaller magazine isn’t a problem at all. This smaller magazine doesn’t lend itself as well to Trios and Quads, but it has a relatively slow fire rate for an AR, so it’s not a dealbreaker. You just have to make sure every shot counts, which isn’t too difficult given the Holger 556’s incredible accuracy. As for what makes the Holger 556 so good, its biggest strength is its lack of weaknesses. There’s no reason to avoid this meta assault rifle, as it either excels or performs well in every notable stat. That is true of only a small handful of weapons, making this rendition of the G36 rather special. Best Holger 556 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: Chrios-6 Match – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – Assault Rifles are best built for long-range combat, and the Holger 556 is no different. The Chrios-6 Match barrel and the Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider greatly improve recoil and vertical kick control, also increasing the damage range, and making those long-range engagements a breeze to win. Equally, the Bruen Heavy Support Grip will boost the ADS speed while using the weapon, allowing you to move more freely in an engagement. It also provides increased horizontal recoil control. While the optic you choose is up to personal preference, the JAK Glassless Optic has long since established itself as the meta option. It has a clear reticle and provides easy-to-use sights, giving it an edge over Warzone’s many other options. Finally, the 40 Round Mag is the largest available on the Holger 556, and a larger magazine is always useful in Warzone. Admittedly, this relatively small magazine can be a hindrance in large-scale team fights, which is something to be mindful of when using this assault rifle. Best Holger 556 class: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time – Increases the duration of your Tac Sprint and reduces its refresh time when not using it. – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand – Gives you faster reloading. – Perk 3: Quick Fix – Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. – Perk 4: Resolute – Gives you a boost of speed when hit with an enemy gunshot. – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Two of the best perks to run in Warzone if you like to play aggressively are Double Time and Resolute. The former gives you more Tac Sprint while also having it recharge faster, while the latter gives you a burst of speed when hit and can get you out of a sticky situation with ease. Both of these help increase mobility and make it easier to push and escape from other teams. Quick Fix is another great perk, giving equipped Armor Plates the additional effect of immediately kickstarting health regen, an effect that is also triggered by killing players. Similarly, Sleight of Hand is incredible on weapons like the Holger 556, as it helps keep your gun loaded at all times, which is especially important given this AR’s smaller magazine capacity. Without this perk, you run the risk of getting caught reloading, which is a death sentence at the best of times. For equipment, the current Warzone meta still favors a Throwing Knife and Smoke Grenade, so that’s what you should use. Throwing Knives are great for quickly finishing off downed targets without having to waste shots, while a Smoke Grenade can be used to cloak open areas, making it easier to cross them safely. How to unlock the Holger 556 To unlock the Holger 556, you’ll need to reach Level 37. This shouldn’t take long at all, but the process can still be sped up by taking advantage of Double XP weekends and tokens. Alternatively, you can also extract with it in MWZ, and it’ll instantly unlock for use. Best Holger 556 alternative in Warzone Aside from the Holger 556, another strong option to use is the MCW, which is even more accurate from long range. The MCW has a slower TTK than the Holger 556, but makes up for it by being the easiest long-range weapon to use in Warzone. For more top builds like this Holger 556 class, check out the meta loadouts that are dominating Warzone right now. Alternatively, using the best SMGs, best Sniper Rifles, and most popular weapons will give you the best chance of winning more Warzone matches, be that in regular game modes or Ranked Play.

Best Holger 556 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe Holger 556 has been one of the best weapons in Modern Warfare 3 since launch and that hasn’t changed in Season 3. Here is the best Holger 556 MW3 loadout that will make your multiplayer lobbies easier than ever. Although it isn’t quite as dominant as it was back in Season 1, the Holger 556 remains one of the best assault rifles in MW3 Season 3. It is a fantastic gun that remains one of the strongest in the meta, even if other ARs like the MCW are more popular these days. Here is all you need to know about the best loadout to use on the Holger 556 to make this powerful assault rifle both accurate and hard-hitting. Contents Best Holger 556 MW3 loadout – Holger 556 loadout: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Holger 556 in MW3 – Best Holger 556 alternative in MW3 – Best Holger 556 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Wrathguard Compensator – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: RB Addle Assault Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Rear Grip: Morn-20 Grip – The Holger 556 suffers from having a bit more recoil than most other meta weapons. If you want to make this assault rifle accurate enough to be worth using, you’ll need specific attachments including the Wrathguard Compensator which very noticeably improves recoil control. That alone isn’t enough though so you should also equip both the RB Addle Assault Stock and Morn-20 Grip. With all three of these attachments, the Holger 556 is accurate enough to challenge even the likes of the MCW and SVA 545 at long range while offering a superior TTK. To avoid this loadout becoming too sluggish it’s also worth using the DR-6 Handstop. This meta underbarrel improves mobility and handling across the board, with the enhancements to ADS speed and strafe speed being the standout reasons to use it. Finally, although the Holger 556 has decent enough iron sights it’s always worth using an optic where possible to make it easier to keep shots on target. Having been released in Season 3, the JAK Glassless Optic is a top-tier option with a clean reticle. Holger 556 loadout: Perks & equipment Vest: Gunner Vest – Gloves: Scavenger Gloves – Gear: EOD Padding – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Lethal: Semtex – The Gunner Vest is ideal when you’re in the mood to go aggressive as it improves the reload speed of your weapon and lets you deploy with max ammo. This makes it easier to go on long killstreaks without running out of ammo, something that is made even easier with the Scavenger Gloves which resupply extra ammo from fallen enemies. EOD Padding lowers the damage taken from incoming grenades. Especially on smaller maps like Shipment, this is really strong and will save your life several times a game though even on larger maps it’s still a good choice. The combo of Semtex and Stun Grenades is a classic combination that has always been effective, and MW3 Season 3 is no exception. The Semtex is perfect for going on the offensive and blowing up enemy players while a Stun Grenade will leave them immobile and unable to fight back. How to unlock the Holger 556 in Modern Warfare 3 You need to reach level 37 to unlock the Holger 556 in Modern Warfare 3. Once you get it you’ll then need to work through 24 gun levels to obtain all of its unique attachments. Best Holger 556 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The MTZ-556 is another versatile assault rifle that can compete against SMGs up close while still being dangerous from afar. It is harder to use than the Holger 556 but is rewarding for those able to control its recoil. Be sure to check out these other MW3 loadouts to stay ahead of the competition: Best MW3 loadouts | Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | SVA 545 loadout | BP50 loadout | RAM-7 loadout

Best Holger 26 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more Using a meta Holger 26 loadout can turn the powerful LMG into one of Warzone’s best guns, with its TTK and effective range rivaling the very best Call to Duty has to offer. Since Modern Warfare 3’s integration, LMGs have played an important role in Warzone’s meta. One of the best examples of this is the Holger 26, which has been the number one option in the meta since the DG-58 LSW was nerfed back in Season 4. This excellent machine gun offers some of the best accuracy and damage range of any weapon in Modern Warfare 3’s arsenal. This lends itself well to Warzone, where gunfights often take place at long range, especially in Ranked Play. These strengths led the Holger 26 to become one of the most used weapons throughout both Season 3 and Season 4. That has continued into the current meta and doesn’t look likely to change anytime soon, so you’ll definitely want to try this gun out. Best Holger 26 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: Holger Factory Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Ascent Lord Stock – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – The Holger 26 is one of the easiest weapons to build in Warzone, as all you need to do is prioritize recoil control without negatively impacting aiming stability. The best attachment for this is the Ascent Lord Stock, which steadies any inaccuracy while firing while also massively increasing recoil control. Equally, the Bruen Heavy Support Grip and Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider make for a great combination to further minimize recoil. When used together, these improve recoil control by about 20%, making the Holger 26 laser accurate at any range. Next up, equip the Holger Factory Barrel, which is mainly used for the damage range boost it provides. The Holger 26 has a very competitive TTK, so extending its damage range to make it even better at long range is a must. Finally, the JAK Glassless Optic is still the best overall optic in Warzone. It has crystal-clear sightlines and can help you line up and track enemies at any distance. This is fantastic on a primary like the Holger 26, which excels in long-range gunfights. Best Holger 26 class: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time – Increases Tac Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand – Reload faster. – Perk 3: Quick Fix – Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. – Perk 4: High Alert – Vision pulses when spotted by an enemy player outside of view. – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Double Time remains the best Perk 1 in Warzone, with the improvements it provides to Tactical Sprint being invaluable when moving around the map. Meanwhile, Sleight of Hand has a natural synergy with LMGs like the Holger 26, as it reduces its brutal reload time, which takes 4.6 seconds without the perk. For Perk slot 3, Quick Fix is a fantastic choice, with it immediately restoring health every time you use an armor plate. This is great for when you are under pressure and need to heal. Relying on natural health regeneration won’t always be an option, especially in the midst of a heated duel. In slot 4, High Alert is still a top-tier option after all these seasons, providing intel in the form of directional warnings whenever an enemy player aims in your direction. This will save your life more often than not, making it an obvious choice in a mode like Warzone where death can be so costly. A Frag Grenade works well in the lethal equipment slot, giving you an excellent tool to clear out a room or lay some damage on an enemy behind cover. A well-placed grenade toss can cause a target to come running right into your crosshairs. Finally, the tactical slot is best used on a Flash Grenade to blind enemies, giving you a huge advantage in most gunfights. How to unlock the Holger 26 The Holger 26 is unlocked through the armory, first accessible at level 25. After unlocking the armory, activate the Holger 26 and then either complete 5 daily challenges or win 5 matches. Alternatively, finding and extracting the MW3 LMG in zombies will also unlock it. Best Holger 26 alternative in Warzone The Bruen Mk9 is a direct competitor to the Holger 26, with both being relatively mobile LMGs that make up for their smaller magazines with superior handling and mobility. The Bruen fires faster, while the Holger is more accurate, ensuring that they both have a place in the meta. That’s all for the best Holger 26 Warzone loadout, for more meta classes, check out which assault rifles, SMGs, and snipers are dominating right now. Or if you want to use another powerful LMG, this TAQ Eradicator loadout has you covered.

Best Holger 26 loadout in Modern Warfare 3: Class setup, attachment, perks ActivisionIf you’re considering using the Holger 26 Light Machine Gun (LMG) in Modern Warfare 3’s Season 3, we’ve got you covered with a detailed loadout guide. Learn about this weapon’s recommended attachments, perks, and other essential details. The Holger 26 is one of the first LMG’s that you can access when first starting out in Modern Warfare 3, and one that can be a great option when kitted out the right way. There are a handful of attachments that can help the Holger 26 rise up above the rest in the pool for Season 3. So keep reading to find out what you need to do to make this LMG a force of nature on the battlefield. Content Best Holger 26 loadout in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Holger 26 MW3 loadout: Equipment and perks – How to unlock Holger 26 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Holger 26 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Holger 26 loadout in Modern Warfare 3 Muzzle: Shadowstrike Suppressor – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – Stock: RB Crotalus Assault Stock – Optic: Mk. 3 Reflector – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – The Shadowstrike Supressor is going to give you an edge with stealth by reducing your visibility and sound. Especially with this loadout’s focus on long-range combat, this can be a huge advantage in enemies not finding your position. The Mk. 3 Reflector is going to improve your accuracy when taking shots from a distance thanks to its improved visual clarity. These long-range shots will be further improved by the RB Crotalus Assault Stock that will improve your stability and reduces recoil. This will help when you are sustaining fire as well. However, if you need to move to a new position, the XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop is going to give you a boost in your overall speed and maneuverability. Finally, the 40 Round Mag is going to help you keep firing for longer periods of time to help take out multiple opponents in the same encounter. Best Holger 26 MW3 loadout: Equipment and perks Vest: Infantry increases your Tac Sprint duration to help you get around quicker – – Gloves: Commando Gloves allows you to reload while sprinting to make sure you can relocate more easily – – Boots: Stalker Boots gives you a boost to speed to add even more maneuverability – – Gear: Bone Conductor Headset improves audio so you can hear other players’ footsteps and gunshots – – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Field Equipment: Battle Rage – The Perks for this loadout are largely there to help your movement speed in a match, so that you can get from location to location better, especially the Infantry Vest and Stalker Boots. The Commando Gloves are there allow you to reload while sprinting which can be a massive benefit when trying to move positions. How to unlock Holger 26 in Modern Warfare 3 In order to unlock the Holger 26, you will to reach level 25 and get access to Armory Unlocks. Once you do that, you can activate the Holger 26 challenge which includes the completion of 5 daily challenges. Best Holger 26 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The best alternative to the weapon in Modern Warfare 3 is the Bruen MK9. This weapon has a really high fire rate and is one of the best weapons at close range. This concludes everything that we know about Holger 26 in Modern Warfare 3. If you found it informative, do not forget to check out some of our other guides at Dexerto. Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5

Best HDR Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionOne of Warzone’s classic Sniper Rifles since the beginning, the HDR has seen its fair share of highs and lows. But with the meta changing in CoD Warzone Season 3 Reloaded, the best HDR loadout has become a whole lot more viable in Season 4. If you fancy yourself a sharpshooter in Warzone, chances are you’ve had the HDR in your hands at one point or another. The fast-firing sniper was a popular pick in the early days of Verdansk but soon got lost in the mix with Black Ops Cold War’s integration. Thanks to some considerable balance tweaks, it benefits at long-range in Caldera’s open space. Not only that, but it’s one of few Sniper Rifles in Warzone that can one-shot an opponent at any range! This has made it the most popular sniper in Season 4, but you’ll need a top-tier loadout to get the most out of the weapon. Here’s exactly what you should be running to get the most out of the HDR in Warzone Season 4. Contents Best HDR Warzone loadout: Attachments – Best HDR Warzone class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the HDR in Warzone – Alternative to the HDR Warzone loadout – Best HDR Warzone loadout: Attachments Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 26.9″ HDR Pro – Laser: Tac Laser – Optic: Variable Zoom Scope – Stock: FTAC Stalker-Scout – By itself, the HDR doesn’t particularly stand out in any area other than Bullet Velocity. But combine this with its killing ability and it becomes one of the game’s best long-range annihilators. In order to get there, your Muzzle and Barrel are the two most important attachments. We’ve gone with the Monolithic Suppressor and the 26.9″ HDR Pro. While the former doesn’t specify a boost, a secret 15% Bullet Velocity buff will be applied to the loadout. These two options come with some pretty hefty downsides though. They’ll lower your ADS speed, so that’s where the Tac Laser and FTAC Stalker-Scout Stock come into play. With these equipped, the +120ms ADS speed will be negated and actually leave you with a -31ms improvement. Best HDR Warzone class: Perks & Equipment Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – No different from many other popular sniper loadouts, the rest of your setup should be fairly standard. E.O.D is a common Perk for almost any loadout in Caldera as in each game you’ll be pelted with a litany of different devices. Overkill is so we can sport a tip-top SMG to go with our slower, more methodical HDR. Amped is a necessity as it greatly quickens the rate at which you can swap weapons. So if your position has become compromised and you still have the HDR in your hands, Amped will get it out of your hands in good time. Your secondary should be the MP40 as it can tear players to shreds, whereas Thermite is perfect for sniffing out hiding players — maybe even sticking players too! To finish, we’ve gone for the Heartbeat Sensor as it’s instrumental in detecting an enemy’s presence. How to unlock the HDR in Warzone To unlock the HDR in Warzone, players much reach Level 11. Whether you’re new to the game or not, achieving this will be a piece of cake. While we recommend reaching that level in Vanguard multiplayer as it’s quicker, it can easily be done in Warzone. Alternative to the HDR Warzone loadout With the change in Warzone’s Sniper meta, thanks to Warzone Season 3, the ZRG and Gorenko are viable alternatives if the HDR doesn’t suit you. Not only that, the AX-50 is a strong option if you’re looking for another Modern Warfare sniper that can one-shot your opponents. Gone are the days of the Kar and Swiss meta, it’s now time to see which one is the king in your eyes. For some more of the best Warzone loadouts, check these out below: Best warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best HCR 56 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe HCR 56 is a deadly LMG in Warzone 2 that thrives in mid to long-range gunfights, making it a laser beam on Al Mazrah or Vondel with a meta loadout. When it comes to picking a weapon in Warzone 2, the majority of players gravitate toward ARs and SMGs, but that all changed in Season 4. Player health increased from 100 to 150, bringing maximum health up to 300 for a player that is fully armored. Because it takes more bullets to take down enemies, LMGs entered back into meta conversations. One that’s already getting plenty of attention is the HCR 56, a slightly more compact LMG that feels more like an AR. Of course, the HCR 56 comes with an LMG’s trademark firepower and accuracy, making it devastating from a distance with a meta loadout. Contents Best HCR 56 Warzone 2 loadout – Best HCR 56 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the HCR 56 in Warzone 2 – Best HCR 56 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best HCR 56 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Harbinger D20 (+0.1.08, +0.48) – Barrel: FTAC Hornet 20″ (+0.34, -0.23) – Optic: AIM-OP V4 (-0.58, +1.80) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.59, +0.30) – Ammunition: 5.56 High Velocity (-0.29, -4.06) – If you want to ammunition size and firepower of an LMG but the versatility and mobility of an AR, the HCR 56 provides a perfect blend of both. After the Season 4 update, the HCR boasts an impressive TTK of 891 milliseconds in long-range engagements. Our loadout maximizes the LMG’s damage at range while also minimizing recoil kick. There are other weapons with more mobility and better TTK speeds, but the HCR 56’s easy-to-use profile sets it apart from other long-range meta options. Best HCR 56 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – For Base Perks, Double Time is useful as it doubles your tactical sprint duration, making getting around both Al Mazrah and Vondel faster. Using Overkill to run a secondary that covers the HCR 56’s weaknesses, like a meta SMG, is also recommended. Fast Hands ensures you are less likely to get caught while reloading and works well with Overkill as it increases weapon swap speed. For the Ultimate Perk, High Alert is a superb choice as it provides free intel by highlighting the direction of enemy players aiming at you from behind. With Warzone 2’s short TTK, this is one of the few ways to give yourself enough time to react before being downed. Equipment is flexible as there are several strong choices but a Drill Charge and Smoke Grenade are the top picks here. Drill Charges are excellent for flushing out players from hard-to-reach areas, while Smoke Grenades allow you to reposition through open spaces without being punished. How to unlock the HCR 56 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the HCR 56 in Warzone 2, you’ll need to reach level 20 with the STB 556. This shouldn’t take you too long at all and luckily, the STB 556 is a powerful weapon on Al Mazrah, especially with a meta build. Best HCR 56 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the HCR 56 doesn’t fit your style of play, then consider checking out the Lachmann 556. Both weapons have a similar damage profile, but the Lachmann 556 offers more mobility at the cost of TTK speed. That’s all for our HCR 56 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best HCR 56 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s HCR 56 is a slow but deadly LMG capable of dominating any battlefield, as long as it has the right loadout attached. Here’s the best HCR 56 loadout along with the best perks, equipment, and attachments. With over 40 different weapons to choose from in Modern Warfare 2, players are able to explore long-range snipers, close-range shotguns, or heavy LMGs. While LMGs are undeniably bulky, they can pack an impressive punch when used and built correctly. The HCR 56 is no different. It’s heavy but powerful and is capable of a vast amount of versatility. However, to achieve such versatility you need the right loadout. We’ve got the best HCR 56 loadout along with what perks, equipment, and attachments you need to stay at the top of the leaderboard. Contents Best HCR 56 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best HCR 56 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock HCR 56 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best alternatives to HCR 56 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best HCR 56 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Sakin Tread-40 – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Comb: FTAC C11 Riser – Barrel: 24.4“ Bruen S-620 – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – The HCR 56 LMG is powerful but can be extremely heavy and slow, this is why we recommend using attachments to help speed it up overall and keep your aim true. The Sakin Tread-40 muzzle aims to improve your recoil control which is complemented by the FTAC Ripper 56 underbarrel which does the same job with your recoil but also focuses on getting some extra hipfire accuracy for when a battle needs more speed. With a slower weapon like an LMG, you want to be able to deal with both aiming down the sight quickly and accurately hip firing. This is why we recommend using the 24.4“ Bruen S-620 barrel which serves to improve your ADS, movement speed, and hipfire recoil. The FTAC C11 Riser comb will give you the last ADS boost the HCR 56 needs. Lastly, while you don’t need to put a sight on the HCR 56 if you want to do so, we recommend using the Cronen Mini Pro. It will increase your range and accuracy without being an imposing sight that only serves to slow all the changes you’ve made. Best HCR 56 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenade – When it comes to perks, you want to be able to adapt to any situation quickly and tactically. That’s why we recommend using Tracker and Overkill as your two base perks. Tracker will let you get the drop on an enemy while Overkill will allow you to equip a quicker gun or one that takes the enemy out with a few shots. As for your Bonus Perk, Fast Hands is the perfect complement to Overkill and will also enable you to reload a little quicker, something vital for an LMG. Ghost is a no-brainer for an Ultimate Perk. It’s easily one of the best perks in the game and will enable you to stay protected from those annoying UAVs. Lastly, we recommend using Semtex and Flash Grenades to deal some impressive damage and confuse the enemy before going in and clearing out an objective. How to unlock HCR 56 in Modern Warfare 2 Unfortunately, to unlock the HCR 56, you’ll need to play Modern Warfare 2 for a while. You’ll first need to reach player level 41. This will then unlock the STB 556 Assault Rifle. Once that’s available to use, get it to level 20 and the HCR 56 will be available to use. To put it in steps, to unlock the HCR 56 in Modern Warfare 2 you need to: Get to level 41. – Use the STB 556 until it reaches level 20. – Unlock the HCR 56. – Best alternatives to HCR 56 in Modern Warfare 2 The HCR 56 takes a while to get hold of so we recommend using the Sakin MG38 if you want an LMG that’s available from the beginning of the game. Alternatively, if you’re looking for something a little faster and with an impressive punch, you can’t go wrong with an Assault Rifle like the M4, it’s one of the best guns in Modern Warfare 2. Now you know the best HCR 56 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can get right back to wiping out the enemy. While loading up a new game, take a look at some of our other handy Modern Warfare 2 guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Haymaker Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Haymaker boasts a high rate of fire and solid close-range damage. We’ve got the perfect loadout for you to capitalize on those strengths and conquer the lobby in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. MW3 introduced three new shotguns, the Lockwood 680, the Haymaker, and the Riveter, each boasting unique strengths and weaknesses. The Lockwood delivers the best damage in the class, but it suffers from a slow rate of fire since it’s a pump-action. On the other hand, the Riveter‘s full-auto nature will have you delivering rounds in seconds, but its recoil and damage leave much to be desired. The Haymaker is somewhere in between the two weapons, as it has a solid damage profile and fire rate to match. If you’re looking to add this to your arsenal, we’ve got you covered with the best Haymaker loadout for Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Best Haymaker Warzone loadout Muzzle: Crown Breaker Choke – Barrel: Imperator Long Barrel – Laser: STOVL Dr Laser Box – Magazine: 20 Round Drum – Conversion Kit: JAK Maglift Kit – The backbone of this loadout for the Haymaker is the JAK Maglift Kit, which narrows the pellet spread of the gun, while also giving you a huge bonus to using Tac Stance and Hipfire. It turns it into something more accurate but still incredibly powerful. You will want to continue tightening up the pellet spread of the gun with the muzzle. In this case, the Crown Breaker Choke is the standout choice, as it slightly increases your damage range while boosting your hip fire spread and reducing Tac-Stance spread. In addition, the Imperator Long Barrel also increases your range and bullet velocity, meaning better range and faster bullet arrival. A laser is always a good choice for weapons that excel in close quarters, and the STOVL Dr Laser Box is a great choice. It’ll boost your hip fire recoil control for those close encounters, and it helps your hip fire spread while also reducing Tac-Stance spread. Rounding out the Haymaker loadout, The 20 Round Mag will give you more shots per ammo clip, and that can be a lifesaver. The standard, eight-shot clip simply doesn’t have enough to be viable. Haymaker Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases the duration of Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Faster reloading – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute Gives you a speed boost when hit by enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – With a shotgun, your first Perk choice should always be Double Time since it’ll increase your Tac Sprint duration and reduce the refresh time, allowing for quick movement around the map. Sleight of Hand should be your secondary Perk option, as it makes reloading much easier when in the middle of a firefight. Quick Fix is one of the best Perks in the game, as you gain instant health regeneration when replating or by killing an enemy. Finally, the brand new Resolute perk should round out your class, as it gives you a short movement speed bonus when taking damage. It also gives you a brief spell of Dead Silence, meaning you’ll gain near-silent footsteps during combat. As for your equipment slots, the Throwing Knife is great for taking out an opponent quickly, and the Smoke Grenade is a useful tool to provide yourself cover when you need it. How to unlock the Haymaker in Warzone You can unlock the Haymaker shotgun by reaching level 39 in MW3’s multiplayer or by extracting it in MWZ. Best alternative to the Haymaker in Warzone While it shoots slower, the Lockwood 680 is a solid choice to sub for the Haymaker, as it packs a hefty damage profile, although its slower fire rate is a big tradeoff. Shotguns are always a great choice in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, but there are many more options to explore. So check out the MCW, Superi 46, and FJX Horus.

Best Haymaker MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachment, perks The Haymaker has been one of the best shotguns in Modern Warfare 3 since the game launched, and that’s still true in Season 3. Here is the best Haymaker MW3 loadout that outguns everything up close. Although the Haymaker is at its best when you get up close and personal, it’s possible to extend its damage range out further than you might expect. This loadout has been optimized for just that, making the Haymaker have the best range possible while retaining its strengths as a mobile, CQB weapon. Here is the best Haymaker loadout possible to turn the semi-auto shotgun into a top-tier close-range option. Contents Best Haymaker MW3 loadout – Best Haymaker MW3 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Haymaker in MW3 – Best Haymaker alternative in MW3 – Best Haymaker MW3 loadout Attachments Conversion Kit: JAK Maglift Kit – Muzzle: Crown Breaker Choke – Barrel: Imperator Long Barrel – Laser: Canted Vibro-Dot 7 – Stock: No Stock Mod – Added in Season 2, the JAK Maglift Kit gives the Haymaker a binary trigger, letting it reach an absurd fire rate. Though this lowers the damage of each shot, the improved fire rate results in a better TTK making the Haymaker more effective. It can be a bit of a handful to get used to at first but with some practice using this conversion kit becomes second nature. As with any shotgun, maximizing damage range on the Haymaker is a must. To do this equip both the Crown Breaker Choke muzzle and Imperator Long Barrel. These not only help shots deal more damage from further away but also narrow how much they spread making kills more consistent. The Haymaker also benefits a lot from the No Stock Mod attachment. The mobility and handling buffs provided by this are incredible and enable the run-and-gun playstyle perfectly suited to a semi-auto shotgun. However, not having a stock along with the Haymaker’s fast fire rate results in a lot of recoil. There’s no easy fix to this but the Canted Vibro-Dot 7 laser helps a lot by letting you aim with a side-mounted laser rather than relying on the shotgun’s iron sights. This makes it easier to stay on target while firing at the Haymaker’s maximum fire rate which is required to unlock its true potential. Best Haymaker MW3 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Overkill Vest – Gloves: Assault Gloves – Boots: Covert Sneakers – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo – Tactical: Stim – Lethal: Drill Charge – The Overkill Vest is a great option with the Haymaker as it lets you use an additional primary weapon for situations where a shotgun isn’t well suited. It is best to use a meta assault rifle like the MCW or Holger 556 for the best results, creating a remarkably well-rounded loadout in the process. With the strongest gloves in MW3 already integrated into the Overkill Vest, the next best option is the Assault Gloves which reduce handling penalties when jumpshotting. These gloves are situational but can be game-changing when required, giving you another tool to push enemies effectively. Being stealthy is important with the Haymaker as you need to get up close without being noticed. To do this you have to use the Covert Sneakers in combination with Ghost T/V Camo which not only makes your footsteps silent but also keeps you hidden from enemy UAVs. Without these, you will have a tough time closing the gap on the other team without getting spotted. In the equipment slots, it’s a good idea to use a Stim which provides quick healing in the heat of battle while a Drill Charge lets you flush out stationary players from objectives and buildings. Drill Charges work well with the Haymaker as you can rush in at close range to finish them off if they happen to survive the initial explosion. How to unlock the Haymaker in Modern Warfare 3 The Haymaker is unlocked after reaching Level 39 in multiplayer. If you want to get the shotgun earlier than that then consider extracting with it in Zombies instead as that will also unlock the Haymaker. Best Haymaker alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The Riveter is a direct competitor to the Haymaker with it also being a fast-firing shotgun that excels up close. It has worse damage range than the Haymaker but is easier to use and can be devastating on smaller maps like Das Haus and Shipment. Consider checking out these guides for more meta MW3 builds that excel up close: Best MW3 loadouts: Ultimate gun tier list | Lockwood 680 loadout | FJX Horus loadout | WSP Swarm loadout | Rival-9 loadout

Best Hauer 77 Warzone loadout class: Attachments, setup, perks ActivisionThe Hauer 77 features in Black Ops Cold War, which means you can now get your hands on it in Call of Duty: Warzone too. Here’s how you should be using it, as well as our recommended perks, equipment and secondary weapon. Shotguns in Warzone are not particularly widespread, with most players opting for submachine guns for close-range encounters. Using a shotgun requires a certain amount of common sense and tactical intelligence, ensuring you make yourself a difficult target whilst laying fire down. That is even more important when using pump-action shotguns like the Hauer 77, which are at a natural disadvantage due to their slower rates of fire. While their damage output is slightly higher, armor in Warzone makes wielding a shotgun more challenging than in a typical CoD game. Best Hauer 77 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Agency Choke – Stock: Tactical Stock – Barrel: 21.6″ Reinforced Heavy – Ammunition: STANAG 9 Rnd Tube – Rear Grip: Dropshot Wrap – Perks Perk 1: E.O.D – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Kilo 141 – Equipment: Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Smoke Grenade (or Stun) – This loadout will see your ability to land heavy-hitting shotgun blows maximised, while also keeping you in the fight at longer ranges. The Kilo 141 is a low-recoil monster, perfect for medium-long ranges (ie any ranges where you won’t be using the Hauer 77). The Agency Choke keeps discretion a major factor in this class, with the 21.6″ Reinforced Heavy barrel going some way to negate the damage drop off it causes. The 9 Round Tube and Dropshot Wrap will allow maximum damage output, breaking through enemies’ armor and hopefully dropping them. The Smoke Grenade is also one we’ll seldom recommend but, when using a shotgun, it can be an ace-in-the-hole. Whether disguising an ambush or facilitating a retreat, smoke can be a shotgun user’s best friend. If you don’t want it, a stun can do a similar job. As previously stated, any shotgun class requires tactical sense and intelligence. If you come up against a MAC-10 or MP5 user, even with a good Hauer setup and decent accuracy, you’ll be torn to shreds. You can check out some of the most popular other Hauer 77 builds at WZRanked. Play sensibly, though, and this class will reward you.

Best Hauer 77 loadout for Black Ops Cold War: Attachments, Perks, Equipment TreyarchIf you’re looking to one-shot enemies in Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War with a shotgun, there’s an incredible Hauer 77 loadout that will help you dominate your Multiplayer matches in no time. Shotguns are back in the secondary slot in Treyarch‘s Black Ops Cold War and players are loving the one-shot potential of the weapons. Currently, there are only two shotguns in-game with those being the Gallo SA12 and Hauer 77. When comparing the weapons, the Hauer 77 comes out on top for base firepower but the Gallo SA12 has a significantly faster rate of fire. Both have their place in Multiplayer, but when making your choice consider your playstyle and which weapon suits you best. The Hauer 77 is the shotty players unlock first at level 7 and is the weapon we’ll be covering today. Here’s the best loadout for the Hauer 77 in 2021. Best Hauer 77 loadout in Black Ops Cold War Here’s how you need to kit out your Hauer 77 shotgun for the most effective multiplayer loadout. Hauer 77 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Duckbill Choke – Barrel: 26.6 Reinforced Heavy – Body: SWAT 5mW Laser Sight – Stock: No Stock – Handle: Serpent Wrap – Primary Weapon M16 – Perks Perk 1: Tactical Mask + Flak Jacket – Perk 2: Scavenger + Tracker – Perk 3: Ninja + Gung-Ho – Wild Card Perk Greed – Equipment Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stimshot – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – This loadout strictly focuses on dominating opponents at medium-close range with the shotgun. The 26.6 Reinforced Barrel increases the Hauer’s damage range and fire rate, allowing players to fire multiple shots extremely quickly. Alongside the SWAT 5mW Laser Sight, the weapon has unbelievably effective hip-fire. The addition of the No Stock attachment increases sprint to fire time by 40%. This allows players to run around the map and pull out their gun with ease when it’s needed. In terms of choosing a primary weapon, the M16 provides this loadout with a medium to long-range option for players. However, the M16 is replaceable with any other assault rifle you prefer. In terms of perks, the six slots provided by Perk Greed allows this class to shine at close range while remaining undetected by enemies. On top of this, the Hauer struggles with its ammo usage so running Scavenger eliminates this issue. The addition of Flak Jacket and Tactical Mask makes this loadout heavily resistant to enemy equipment and capable of clearing areas quickly. Finally, the equipment choices are fairly standard but running Stimshot in the tactical slot is a must. After rushing into a room and taking multiple close-quarter gunfights, the Stimshot is ideal in preparing for your next encounter with an enemy. Now, all there’s to do is make this Hauer 77 loadout and try it out in Multiplayer for yourself.

Best Hades LMG loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionCall of Duty Mobile Season 7 is here and so is the Hades LMG from Call of Duty: Black Ops. The new weapon has proven pretty deadly and there are a few ways to set it up through loadouts and classes. Ever since it was first released, Call of Duty: Mobile has taken some of the most iconic maps, characters, weapons, and modes from CoD history and put them all together to make an incredible experience. The mobile title is still going strong deep into 2021 and Season 7 – The Elite of the Elite – is here, bringing with it the Modern Warfare 2 map Scrapyard, two weapons, and a whole host of new cosmetics. In amongst those two new weapons is the Black Ops classic Hades LMG. It was powerful the last that CoD players were able to wield it – Black Ops 4 – and it remains incredibly strong in CoD: Mobile. To get your hands on the Hades LMG, you don’t need to do anything crazy. Just hit Level 21 on the Season 7 battle pass and it’ll be available in your arsenal. Of course, just like every other weapon in CoD: Mobile, there are a whole hos to attachments to throw onto your Hades. However, the LMG already seems to have settled into a meta of sorts. Players have been rocking the Agile Stock, 84 round Hybrid Mag, and Rapid-Fire barrel as their cornerstone attachments. While the Hades is an LMG, these attachments will help it become a bit more of a run-and-gun weapon that matches many of the assault rifles that could take its place. Best CoD Mobile Hades LMG class Barrel: Rapid-Fire barrel – Stock: Agile Stock – Underbarrel: Crossbar – Laser: Aim Assist Laser – Ammunition: 84 round Hybrid Mag – Of course, while some players believe that’s the best setup around, not everyone has subscribed to that loadout just yet. In the case of CoD Mobile YouTuber Godzly, he opts to run the Firm Grip Tape instead of the Crossbar underbarrel which he believes helps make it “overpowered” in its current state, replacing how the Chopper fit into the meta. Godzly’s CoD Mobile Hades LMG class Barrel: Rapid-Fire barrel – Stock: Agile Stock – Laser: Aim Assist Laser – Ammunition: 84 round Hybrid Mag – Rear Grip: Firm Grip Tape – As the season rolls on, the weapon will likely be tweaked, so the best loadout will change as we go. If that is the case, well, we’ll update this page so you know what’s best to use and get you ahead of the game.

Best H4 Blixen Warzone loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe best H4 Blixen Warzone loadout can dominate opponents in Warzone Season 5, so find out which attachments you should be using to gain a competitive edge. Warzone Season 5 has arrived, which means players will be looking for the best weapons to use to take down their enemies with ease. Well, for close-quarter combat, you cannot go wrong with the powerful H4 Blixen which continues to maintain its place as one of the most popular SMGs in the game. For those looking for a dominant secondary on Caldera and Fortune’s Keep, the H4 Blixen is certainly an incredibly strong option. In order to help increase your KDA and chances of securing an all-important victory, we’ve outlined the best H4 Blixen loadout you should be using in Warzone. Contents Best H4 Blixen Warzone loadout – Best H4 Blixen setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the H4 Blixen in Warzone – Alternative to the H4 Blixen loadout – Best H4 Blixen Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Bergstrom 17″ F3 – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Removed stock – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 54 Round Mags – Rear Grip: Taped Grip – Ammunition: Lengthened – Perk 1: Fleet – Perk 2: Quick – The best H4 Blixen loadout raises the SMG’s accuracy, fire rate, range, mobility, damage, and control. Having attachments that bolster all aspects of the gun make it incredibly versatile – an area that is incredibly important for building a lethal secondary. First up is the M1941 Hand Stop and the Taped Grip. Both of these attachments raise H4 Blixen’s accuracy, while also providing plenty of recoil control. Not only does this make getting close-quarters headshots much easier, but the ability to hit enemies at mid-range also becomes an option. This is especially true given the Bergstrom 17″ F3 Barrel increases the gun’s damage and range potential. Combine the above with the added fire rate from the Recoil Booster and bullet velocity from Lengthened, and you have a recipe for a hard-hitting SMG. Of course, while the H4 Blixen can be used in mid-range fights, it’s often best to switch to your AR during distant engagements. Fortunately, the Fleet Perk boosts your weapon swap and movement speed, giving you plenty of time to switch to your preferred weapon of choice. Just like most meta SMG loadouts, the H4 Blixen uses the Quick Perk to enhance your mobility even further. After all, being able to run rings and outmaneuver your foes can give you a huge advantage, particularly in close-quarter engagements. As you’ll primarily be using this weapon in close-quarter scenarios, we’ve used the Slate Reflector Optic. This sight offers the perfect amount of magnification for lining up head and body shots, while also not drastically impacting your view. Lastly, the 7.62 Gorenko 54 Round Mags ensure you have plenty of rounds to down multiple foes – an area that is important for any weapon in Warzone. The added ammo count also makes the H4 Blixen incredibly forgiving, so if you’re prone to missing your shots, then the 54 Round can help. Best H4 Blixen setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Primary: Cooper Carbine – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Similar to many Warzone setups, our H4 Blixen loadout also utilizes E.O.D, Amped, and Overkill. E.O.D greatly reduces the damage taken from non-killstreak explosives and fire, which, in a game like Warzone, is a great addition to your setup. Amped allows you to switch between weapons faster, making it particularly useful if you do run out of bullets mid-fight. Lastly, Overkill allows you to equip the deadly Cooper Carbine as your primary. While the H4 Blixen does have mid-range capabilities, having access to one of the best Warzone ARs will only increase your kill potential. If you’re not a fan of the Cooper Carbine, consider using the Grau 5.56 or the KG M40, as both weapons are incredibly strong in the current meta. To round off this loadout, we’ve utilized Semtex and the Heartbeat Sensor in the Lethal and Tactical slots. Semtex is great at flushing out pesky campers, while the Heartbeat Sensor gives you the ability to track down your enemies. How to unlock the H4 Blixen in Warzone In order to unlock the H4 Blixen, you’ll need to get three slide kills in a single match fifteen times. We recommend heading over to Vanguard and playing in the game’s standard multiplayer modes. Not only will the smaller maps make encountering foes quicker, but the limited player health will also lead to plenty of easy kills. If you only have access to Warzone, then we recommend playing on Rebirth Island as this map favors close-quarter engagements. Alternative to the H4 Blixen loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the H4 Blixen, then consider using this MP40 loadout. This iconic weapon continues to be one of the best SMGs in Warzone thanks to its incredible mobility, damage, and fire rate. It may not have as much range potential as the H4 Blixen, but it is incredibly dominant in close-quarter firefights. If you’re a fan of the run-and-gun play style, then you really can’t go wrong with the MP40. If you prefer to keep things simple and follow the crowd, the Marco 5 is always a great choice as it’s sitting as the most popular SMG in the game. So, there you have it, the best H4 Blixen loadout you should be using in Warzone Season 5. Make sure you check out our Warzone page and weapon loadouts below to get ahead in the new update. Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Top 20 highest-earning players | Welgun | MP40 || PPSh-41 | AK-47 | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Highest-earning Warzone players | Armaguerra 43 | Swiss K31 | Best STG44

Best H4 Blixen Vanguard loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe best H4 Blixen loadout can tear through your enemies in the Vanguard Season 3 Reloaded update, so here are all the best attachments that increase its kill potential. The H4 Blixen (Carl Gustaf) is the latest SMG to be added to both Vanguard and Warzone in the Season 3 Reloaded update. giving players a deadly new weapon to get to grips with. Boasting both great damage, mid-range coverage, and a scintillating fire rate – the H4 Blixen is shaping up to be one of the best SMGs in the game. Whether it has what it takes to overthrow the MP40 and Owen Gun remains to be seen, but for now, the H4 Blixen is shaping up to be a top meta contender. In order to maximize your kill potential and get you securing those game-winning Killstreaks, we’ve outlined the best H4 Blixen Vanguard loadout. Contents Best H4 Blixen Vanguard loadout – Best H4 Blixen setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the H4 Blixen in Vanguard – Alternative to the H4 Blixen loadout – Best H4 Blixen Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Jonsson 9″ RMK – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Karlsson Padded Coz – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 9mm 72 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Fleet – Kit: Quick – Our best H4 Blixen (Carl Gustaf) Vanguard loadout is fairly similar to our Warzone version, with the build increasing the gun’s damage and mobility. As the majority of engagements in Vanguard favor close to mid-range firefights, we’ve utilized attachments that help keep it competitive in these scenarios. First up is the Recoil Booster and Jonsson 9″ RMK. These two attachments raise the SMG’s fire rate, ensuring you’re dishing out as much damage as possible. In fact, the H4 Blixen can quickly chew through ammunition, so we recommend using the 9mm 72 Round Mags. The increase in fire rate does come at a cost to accuracy, but this weakness can be covered up by using the Karlsson Padded Coz and M1941 Hand Stop. Because of the added accuracy increase, the Slate Reflector is a perfect choice. Read More: Best Carl Gustaf Warzone loadout – Not only is it one of the cleanest Optics in the game, but it is also the best option for close-range firefights. After all, having an Optic that doesn’t hinder your vision and ADS time is incredibly important. In order to raise the H4 Blixen’s ADS speed and overall mobility, the Fabric Grip, Fleet, and Quick are the best options. So, if you enjoy going for sneaky flanks or aggressively rushing down your foes, then be sure to equip these attachments. While you’ll primarily be using the H4 Blixen in close-range engagements, the added bullet velocity from Lengthened does make hitting distant targets easier – an area that can prove vital on Vanguard’s larger maps. Best H4 Blixen setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & equipment Perk 1: Fortified – Perk 2: Forward Intel – Perk 3: Lightweight – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Armor – The best H4 Blixen (Carl Gustaf) loadout uses Fortified, Forward Intel, and Lightweight as its Perk choices. Fortified reduces the damage done by enemy explosives and fire, which gives you more survivability. Next up is Forward Intel. This perk enables you to instantly gain knowledge on enemy locations without the need to run any reconnaissance Killstreaks. Knowing enemy spawn rotations and avoiding any backstabs is extremely useful, so this Perk is a must for high killcount games. Rounding off the list is Lightweight. As the H4 Blixen favor close-range firefights, this class greatly benefits from the added mobility of gained from Lightweight. Simply tear around the map and use the added speed to run rings around your foes. Having access to MK2 Frag Grenades is always nice, particularly when you need to flush out pesky campers. While the H4 Blixen’s 72 Round Mags will give you plenty of ammunition, the Machine Pistol can get you out of a tight situation. Lastly, both the Stun Grenade and Armor Field Upgrade maximize your survivability, enabling you to turn the tide of even the fiercest of firefights. How to unlock the H4 Blixen in Vanguard In order to unlock the H4 Blixen (Carl Gustaf) in Vanguard, you’ll need to get three slide kills in a single match fifteen times. It’s important to note, that once you’ve got your three slide kills, you must finish the match for it to count. If you leave before the end of the match, it will not register, meaning you’ll need to start the process all over again. Alternative to the H4 Blixen loadout The Owen Gun is one of the deadliest SMGs in Vanguard, so if you’re looking for an alternative to the H4 Blixen, then consider using our best Owen Gun loadout. This oldschool weapon boasts great speed and accuracy, making it a top pick for close-quarter scenarios. While it may not have as much damage range as the H4 Blixen, it more than makes up for that with its lightning-fast fire rate. Make sure you take this gun for a spin and see how you get on in Season 3 Reloaded. So, there you have it, the best H4 Blixen loadout you should be using in Vanguard. Make sure you check out our Vanguard page and weapon loadouts below to get ahead in the new update. Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Top 20 highest-earning players | Welgun | MP40 || PPSh-41 | AK-47 | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Highest-earning Warzone players | Armaguerra 43 | Swiss K31 | Best STG44

Best guns for each weapon class in Call of Duty: Modern Warfare Call of Duty: Modern Warfare is absolutely brimming with all kinds of deadly weaponry and you’ll need to kit yourself out with the very best guns if you wish to stand a chance in the game’s highly competitive multiplayer. However, choosing a good weapon loadout can be a little tricky, especially when you are presented with so much choice. After all, building a decent loadout that you can rely on in the virtual battlegrounds is incredibly important – in fact, you’ll need to have your wits about you if you wish to get your hands on the game’s best killstreaks. There is a gun for every kind of playstyle as well as numerous attachments that can either help bolster or hinder your overall DPS. However, with so many options available, it can be a rather tricky process to know which weapons to prioritize. Fortunately, we’ve put together a list of the best weapons that you should be equipping and how you can use them to crush your foes in Modern Warfare. Best Assault Rifle: M4A1 The M4A1 is currently the most devastating gun in the entire game thanks to its incredibly accurate firing pattern, low recoil, high damage, decent hipfire, and fantastic range. Once you hit level six, you’ll want to prioritize using this ever-popular assault rifle over anything else. If you’ve been playing Modern Warfare since launch, then chances are you’ve seen this reliable rifle pop up in multiplayer matches more than any other gun in the game. In fact, the M4A1 even outclasses weapons unlocked at later ranks, making it the current king in most firefights. Read More: Five best M4A1 classes and loadouts – Its 30-round magazine and high damage make cutting down multiple enemies a breeze, completely shredding through your foes within seconds. This assault rifle is especially lethal at range, especially when you pair it with the 4.0x Flip Hybrid Optic and Recon gun perk. Even the M4’s vertical recoil is incredibly easy to handle, so don’t be afraid to let the bullets fly when you see long-distance enemies. We expect Infinity Ward to tone down the M4 soon, so be sure to abuse its power while you can. Best SMG: MP5 Those of you who played the Modern Warfare beta will know just how lethal the MP5 was and while it’s no longer as strong as it used to be, it’s still the next best choice after the M4A1. While the MP5 may be classified as an SMG, we found that it performs more akin to an assault rifle thanks to its decent engagement range and accurate firing pattern. It may not deal as much damage as the M4, but its fast fire rate and mobility make it the perfect gun for those that wish to be more aggressive in their pursuit of victory. To make matters even better, the MP5 has plenty of attachments that greatly decrease the weapon’s ADS speed, giving you a noteworthy advantage over those with slower sight speeds. Meanwhile, the hipfire is also nothing to be scoffed at either, especially when you attach the 5mW laser and Merc Foregrip. If you’re tired of methodically scanning every corner in search of enemies and simply wish to fulfill a more traditional run gun playstyle, then the MP5 will enable you to do just that. Best Shotgun: 725 While the majority of games often boil down to medium distance firefights over defensive strongpoints, there are times when a shotgun can come in handy. After all, there’s no better feeling than obliterating a pesky team of campers with a few lethal rounds to the face. It may seem counter-intuitive to be running around the map with a shotgun when death can come from anywhere, but if you’re willing to be a little smart with your movements, then you’ll be able to wrack up plenty of kills with the 725 in no time. Try to aggressively flank around your foes by using the terrain to your advantage. Don’t go sprinting into areas with no cover – instead, use the various obstacles to force your opponents’ into close-quarters scenarios. While the 725 has decent one-shot potential, you’ll need to deliver both rounds at a distance if you want down any targets that aren’t close to you. In order to get the most out of this break-action shotgun, consider equipping Double Time, Ghost, Tune-Up and Dead Silence to keep you mobile and your movements concealed. We found that maps like Azhir Cave, Hackney Yard, St. Petrograd, Rammaza, and Gun Runner offer plenty of close-range encounters, so be sure to take this powerful shotgun for a spin if you want to claim a dominant victory. Best LMG: PKM Light machine guns are incredibly strong in Modern Warfare, especially in objective-based game modes that require you to lock down an objective. The PKM is an absolutely devastating LMG that can make mincemeat of multiple targets thanks to its fast fire rate, high damage, and massive 100-round magazine. The majority of Modern Warfare’s LMG’s suffer from low fire rates and lackluster control, but the PKM is a great jack of all trades gun that strikes the perfect balance between overall lethality and general usability. While the PKM may be outclassed by the likes of the M4 and MP5 in close quarters situations, it does have fantastic kill potential when mounted. Try to find favorable lines of sight where you can hunker down and cut off major areas that see high volumes of player traffic. Even at long distances, the PKM can suppress enemy marksman by barraging their position with bullets, giving your teammates more than enough time to scramble onto the objective. Best Marksman Rifle: MK2 Carbine This highly accurate lever-action rifle can stop an enemy dead in their tracks with a single well-placed round to the head or chest. If you have decent aim and want to secure some satisfying single shot kills, then the trusty Carbine will enable you to do just that. While the Carbine may not have as much range or control as the other marksman rifles, it does have a much higher rate of fire, making it easier to land consecutive shots before your enemies duck behind cover. If you find yourself struggling to land shots with the EBR-14 and Kar98K, then take the Carbine for a spin. We found that the Carbine absolutely dominates foes on medium-sized maps and can instantly punish any peekers or head glitching enemies before they can even react. Make sure you equip the VLK 3.0 Optic, Compensator, Stippled Grip Tape, FFS MK2 Sport Comb, and Recon gun perk to increase your ADS speed and range. This setup also gives you a slight increase in mobility, so be sure to change up your lines of sight to keep your opponents’ constantly guessing. Best Sniper Rifle: AX-50 While the days of quick scoping and 360 no scoping may be in the past, the trusty sniper rifle’s reign is far from over – in fact, the 32v32 Ground War maps are perfect for chaining long killstreaks with sniper rifles. If you want to start aiming for those montage-worthy headshots, then the AX-50 is the best sniper rifle for the job. This bolt action rifle offers blisteringly fast kills no matter if you aim for headshots or body shots, allowing you to take down long-distance enemies with ease. The only downfall with this gun is the rather lengthy ADS speed, but this can be countered by using either the Merc Thermal Optic or Cronen C480 Pro Optic. In order to use this high-caliber rifle effectively, you’ll need to have decent aim as a missed shot can instantly give your foe the chance to counter, especially since the AX-50 lets out a beastly noise that can be heard by all nearby opponents. The AX-50 may seem like a rather unwieldy weapon when used in Modern Warfare’s regular game modes, but it’s an absolute monster in Ground War. Best Handgun: X16 Having a trusty sidearm you can rely on when you’re caught a little short can be the difference between life and death. If you happen to run a loadout with a shotgun or sniper, then chances are you’ll need a decent handgun for those clutch moments when you need a little extra range or close quarters damage. Fortunately, the standard X16 provides more than enough firepower to get the job done. While this modest handgun may not look or sound as flashy as .357 Magnum or .50 GS, it does beat them on fire rate, control, and mobility. It can be tempting to opt for pure damage when choosing your sidearm, but this won’t matter if you fail to land the shots needed to actually down a target. The X16 takes the top spot due to its ease of use and decent all-round stats, giving it an edge over the more cumbersome handguns available. Clutch situations rarely happen in Modern Warfare due to the low kill times, however, you’ll be thankful for the added support when you find yourself in need of a few extra rounds. Best Launcher: PILA The sheer number of UAVs and aerial killstreaks present in Modern Warfare makes equipping a rocket launcher a good choice for any players looking to deny the enemy some easy kills. The PILA may be the first launcher you have access to, but its self propelled missiles make downing any pesky recon planes quick and painless. There’s even a free fire option that’s great for clearing out rooms filled with enemy players. Just make sure you find a safe spot devoid of enemy activity before you go to fire the launcher as the targeting system takes a few seconds to lock on, giving your foes more than enough time to stop your anti-aircraft plays. If you find yourself struggling to land any of the non-guided missiles and want a launcher that does all the work for you, then the PILA is the best option. Check out the rest of Dexerto’s Modern Warfare guides to learn even more ways to dominate your competition.

Here are the best guns to use in Black Ops 4 Hardcore modes With updates for Call of Duty: Black Ops 4 coming out left, right and center, fans trying to keep track of what gun is best for what game mode may have a tough time. However, Call of Duty expert and YouTuber TheXclusiveAce has been keeping with all of the updates and breaking down some other sides to the game too. In a recent video that he published on November 24, Ace breaks down the best guns to use in Hardcore game modes, discussing each gun type, laying out those that will give a player the best chance at a one-shot kill and naming his favorite three to use in Hardcore modes. All guns in Hardcore have one-shot kill potential but hitmarkers can come about when shooting through a surface, shooting an enemy with armor, or even when shooting an enemy using Crash. Range is also a big factor and Ace breaks that down, using attachments like Long Barrel and the Suppressor to indicate what boosts and drop-offs guns can have using them. The YouTuber lists the ICR (Assault Rifle), Hades (LMG) and GKS (SMG) as his three favorites for Hardcore modes, going into detail and breaking down why. “Out of all of the SMGs, the one that feels the best to me in Hardcore is definitely the GKS,” Ace says. “This just has to do with the fact that it’s extremely accurate, it’s got a very solid one-shot kill potential and you can increase that one-shot kill potential with long barrel as well, which is great. “Also, since you get the handling of an SMG, this is just a great all-around gun for Hardcore modes.” “I would likely pick the ICR as the best Assault Rifle in Hardcore modes mainly just due to the fact that it’s extremely accurate and versatile. “Having said that,” Ace adds, “You really can’t go wrong with any of the Assault Rifles in this game aside from the Maddox.” “Out of all of the LMGs, I would say the Hades is definitely your best bet within Hardcore simply because it’s the most forgiving,” the YouTuber says whilst breaking down why that’s his favourite LMG. “You can miss a couple of shots and still be able to land that one bullet that you need.” You can view the full video below and get a glimpse of Ace’s breakdown for all the weapon types and his charting of their usability.

Best guns & settings for the Call of Duty: Vanguard Champion Hill Alpha ActivisionCall of Duty: Vanguard Champion Hill Alpha is finally here. With a new CoD comes new weapons, attachments, time to kill, and settings. We’ve got you covered on everything to know for this Alpha. The Vanguard Alpha is giving players a taste of what the game has to offer. For people that may have missed any information, this mode has different perks, guns, equipment, and more. PlayStation players have access to Champion Hill this weekend, where you can drop in with a squad of two or three and fight to be the last team standing. If you just downloaded the Alpha and need some tips on which guns are the best or what settings to use, content creators JGOD and Repullze had made it easy for you. Best guns in CoD: Vanguard Alpha There are four main weapons that people are using in Champion Hill. The STG44, MP-40, BAR, and M1942 are by far the best weapons available for players to use. Content creator JGOD got some early access to the game, and has gone through and created a rough estimate of these four gun’s TTK. (A reminder that these are estimates, and may not account for armor or other factors.) As shown in his chart, the MP-40 has the fastest TTK at 293. Although this weapon does not have the fastest rate of fire out of these four, it has low recoil and is easy to use. Although the MP-40 has the fastest TTK, it still comes down to preference as the BAR is another weapon that does a lot of damage but has a lower rate of fire. You can test any of these weapons out in your games, or try something else like the snipers if that fits your playstyle more. Best settings to use for CoD: Vanguard Alpha If you still need some hello figuring out what settings to run, we’ve got you covered. Warzone streamer and content creator Repullze has released a video showing off the best settings for the Alpha. (Topic starts at 11:41) Below is a list of the settings that he is using while in Champion Hill. Controller Vibration: Off – Trigger Effect: Off – Target Aim Assist: On – Target Aim Assist Mode: Default – ADS Aim Assist: On – Airborne Mantle: Manual – Automatic Sprint: Automatic Tactical sprint – Sprint Cancel Reload: Off – Weapon Mount Activation: ADS + Melee – Slide Behavior: Tap – Aim Down Sight Behavior: Hold – It is very important to make sure that you turn off Motion Blur. This setting is under the ‘Graphics’ tab and is on by default. Once you’ve made all these changes, you should be ready to jump into Champion Hill and get the best gaming experience possible.

Best gun in Black Ops 6 won’t be terrorizing lobbies in Open Beta TreyarchThe Jackal PDW quickly emerged as the standout SMG during the Black Ops 6 Closed Beta. While it dominated almost every lobby over the first weekend, Treyarch is already on the case with nerfs at the ready. As soon as the first Black Ops 6 Beta weekend went live, it instantly became clear what the very best weapons were. While the AMES 85 Assault Rifle led its category, the Jackal PDW SMG stood tall as not only the best in its class but the single strongest gun in the game overall. With the right attachments, the Jackal’s lightning-quick TTK, paired with BO6’s new Omnimovement, made it the most popular pick over the course of the Closed Beta. With everyone using it to some degree, Treyarch has stepped in to put a stop to its dominance. When the Open Beta period gets underway on September 6 from 10 AM PT, the Jackal will be toned down from what we experienced in the first weekend. Mercifully, the reign of the Jackal looks to be over. “Take a break” from using the SMG, Treyarch advised in a September 5 announcement. “It’s been tuned for Weekend 2.” Obviously, the exact nature of its balance adjustments are unclear for now, though we’ll soon learn the full details once patch notes go live on September 6. It could be anything from specific attachment tweaks to overall TTK being reduced to align it with the rest of the game’s arsenal. We also have a number of new weapons joining the mix in the Closed Beta, thanks to the increased level cap now letting players grind to level 30. Among the list is a new SMG, the Tanto .22. Perhaps the Jackal has some competition on its hands. Despite its reign of terror, however, the Jackal isn’t actually the best in class when it comes to every statistic. Much to the surprise of the community, the C9 boasts a faster TTK, so there’s every chance the first SMG unlocked could prove more of a problem in the coming days.

Best GS Magna Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionSeason 3 Reloaded introduced the GS Magna, a fearsome firearm that puts a spin on the traditional Desert Eagle. In order to maximize the unique pistol’s potential, we’ve put together the best GS Magna loadout for you to use in Warzone 2. Akimbo pistols dominated the first half of Warzone 2’s opening season. This was before players could edit their own perk packages, so it was difficult to equip two primary weapons without making sacrifices. Everything changed in Season 1 Reloaded when a nerf made dual-wielding pistols deal less damage to armored enemies. Infinity Ward put the final nail in the coffin in Season 2 by allowing players to edit perk packages again. Players threw aside akimbo pistols in favor of SMGs for their close-range secondary weapon. Akimbo pistols may be back in style, as the new GS Magna has turned heads since its loud introduction in Season 3 Reloaded. Without further ado, let’s jump right into the best GS Magna loadout. Contents Best GS Magna Warzone 2 loadout – Best GS Magna Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the GS Magna in Warzone 2 – Best GS Magna companion weapon in Warzone 2 – Best GS Magna Warzone 2 loadout Barrel: SA Tyrant Fifty (+0.50, +0.40) – Underbarrel: EXF Backdraft Grip (+0.80, +.40) – Ammunition: .50 Pistol Hollowpoint (+0.70, +9.00) – Magazine: 13 Round Mag – Rear Grip: GS Magna Akimbo – The SA Tyrant Fifty barrel and .50 Pistol Hollowpoint ammunition increase recoil steadiness, damage range, and billet velocity. Since this is an akimbo loadout, we recommend using the Backdraft Grip to improve hip fire recoil control and accuracy since aiming down sight doesn’t matter. Even with attachments to improve recoil, the GS Magna struggles to take down an enemy further than 10 meters away accurately. This fully automatic pistol truly shines directly in front of an enemy. Anything around five meters will shred through enemies almost instantaneously. Best GS Magna Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Best Perks Base Perk: Scavenger – Base Perk: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Fast hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – There are a couple of different avenues you can take when choosing perks. The most contentious selection will be the Ultimate Perk. A lot of players choose High Alert, as it gives you a vision pulse when an enemy spots you. However, we expect Ghost to be more useful as it makes players undetectable by UAVs, Portable Radars, and Heartbeat Sensors. Fast Hands should be a no-brainer choice since it makes reloading, using equipment, and swapping weapons faster. This perk could save your life in a gunfight against a skilled opponent. As for the Base Perk slots, we decided to go with Double Time and Scavenger to maximize the ability to escape gunfights and replenish ammo. Best Equipment Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Players should select a throwing knife or drill charge for their lethal choice. Throwing knives make it easier to finish downed enemies without wasting ammunition, while drill charges are great for taking out campers. As for the tactical slot, players shouldn’t look further than the smoke grenade. Using smoke to move between cover at the end of matches or rotate to a new circle is a game-changer. How to unlock the GS Magna in Warzone 2 Players can unlock the GS Magna by getting 30 headshot kills using the .50 GS. Additionally, players can simply purchase the weapon with real money via a Store Bundle. Best GS Magna companion weapon in Warzone 2 Instead of offering an alternative weapon, as usual, it makes more sense to recommend a companion weapon. The GS Magna is a secondary weapon with limitations holding it back from being used alone. The Lachmann 556 received a major buff in the Season 3 Reloaded weapon balancing update, making it an easy choice for a reliable primary weapon to pair with the GS Magna.

Best GS Magna MW2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionThe GS Magna is a fully automatic version of the .50 GS added in Modern Warfare 2 Season 3 Reloaded. If you’re looking for a top-tier setup to dominate with we’ve got just the thing, here’s our best GS Magna loadout in MW2. Introduced in Season 3 Reloaded, the GS Magna is a full auto rendition of the .50 GS, better known as the Desert Eagle. The GS Magna is a powerful handgun that whilst difficult to control can annihilate enemies unfortunate enough to get close to it. It won’t be for everyone but in the right hands, the Magna is one of the best secondaries in Modern Warfare 2. Here’s the best loadout for the GS Magna, including the attachments, perks, and equipment to use. Contents Best GS Magna MW2 Loadout – Best GS Magna MW2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the GS Magna in MW2 – Best GS Magna alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best GS Magna MW2 Loadout Attachments Muzzle: Matuzek Crown – Barrel: SA Tyrant Fifty – Underbarrel: TV Wrecker Grip – Magazine: 13 Round Mag – Rear Grip: EXF Resistance Grip – When building the GS Magna the most important thing to improve is its heavy recoil. Unsurprisingly, making a pistol that chambers huge .50 AE rounds automatic doesn’t result in the most controllable gun. To improve recoil it’s best to use both the Matuzek Crown and EXF Resistance Grip. When combined these make it much easier to stay on target when firing. The SA Tyrant Fifty barrel further reduces recoil although the main benefit is the improved damage range and bullet velocity it provides. This attachment is key for extending the GS Magna’s effective range beyond just a few meters. It’s worth using the 13 Round Mag as the GS Magna’s fast fire rate can rapidly dump a full magazine. Finally, the TV Wrecker Grip is an underbarrel that improves Hip Fire Accuracy with no downsides making it a superb attachment. Best GS Magna MW2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Cold Blooded – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – The GS Magna’s limited range means that you’ll want to get up close and personal to make the most of it. Double Time is perfect for this as it doubles your tactical sprint duration. Equally, Tracker can make finding enemies and closing the gap on them easier. Cold Blooded is a good choice for the Bonus Perk slot. It’s a good all purpose Perk that can save you from getting killed by enemy streaks. For the Ultimate Perk, Ghost is the best choice as it keeps you off the radar, protecting you from UAVs and Heartbeat Sensors. This is useful for moving around the map more freely without being punished. Your choice of equipment is flexible but the Semtex always makes for a fantastic lethal as it’s useful in a wide range of situations. A Stim is recommended for Tactical as it lets you heal up quickly and resets tactical sprint for getting around the map faster. How to unlock the GS Magna in MW2 The GS Magna can be unlocked in MW2 by getting 30 Headshot Operator Kills using the .50 GS handgun. This challenge was added in Season 3 Reloaded alongside the GS Magna. Alternatively, successfully extracting in DMZ with a GS Magna will also unlock the automatic pistol. This can either be looted from another player or dropped by a friend who has already unlocked the GS Magna. Best GS Magna alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 Those who like the appeal of a hard hitting handgun should consider using either the .50 GS or Basilisk. Both are capable of one shot kills and have impressive range for a secondary. Another option is to try out the FTAC Siege also released in Season 3 Reloaded. Much like the GS Magna, the Siege has a high fire rate and is excellent at close range. That’s all for our GS Magna loadout! For more of our MW2 & Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Season 5 Groza Warzone loadout class: Attachments, setup, perks Treyarch/ActivisionBlack Ops Cold War’s integration into Warzone introduced a range of exciting weapons to the game. One weapon that stood out from the crowd right from the get go was the Groza assault rifle. Let’s check out the best attachments in Season 5 Reloaded for the Groza and help create a loadout that will dominate matches. Season 5 Reloaded of Warzone and has arrived and it has brought a wealth of new content to the game. From new game modes to operator skins, it’s fair to say there’s a lot to get excited about. Despite this, it’s sometimes difficult to know which guns and loadouts are best to take into Verdanksk so you can dominate your opponents. Surprisingly, the Groza was one of the few assault rifles that received a buff with this patch, possibly looking to shake up the meta. While the gun isn’t the most reliable in long-range gunfights, with the right attachments, it can be a menace at close-to-medium range. Without further ado, let’s check out a loadout that gets the most out of the weapon and its strengths. Best Groza loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Underbarrell: Spetsnaz Speedgrip – Barrel: 15.3″ Ultralight – Ammunition: VDV 60 RND Fast Mag – Stock: Raider Stock – Perks E.O.D – Overkill – Amped – Equipment Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Lethal: Semtex – The weapon received a buff in Season 5 Reloaded, seeing its sprint-to-fire speed increase 15%. This puts the gun into a hybrid AR-SMG role and can allow players to get up close and personal but still take long-distance engagements. This loadout focuses on medium-range gunfights, as this is where the Groza shines. This weapon’s low recoil fits well into the meta and can be paired up really well as a sniper support. Read more: Best Warzone Assault Rifle loadouts – The GRU Suppressor is very common among all the assault rifles in Warzone. This suppressor is by far the best muzzle possible as it keeps the weapon silent and drastically reduces the vertical recoil. Pair it up with the Spetsnaz Speedgrip because this helps with both the vertical and horizontal recoil of the weapon, allowing players to melt their opponents. On top of this, the addition of the VDV 60 RND Fast Mag will ensure you stay topped up with ammunition and provides fast reload speeds to get back into the fight as fast as possible. This can allow the AR hybrid to compete with other SMGs like the Mac-10 and the MP5 that are really popular. The 15.3″ Ultralight will allow you to take closer engagements a lot better than without it. This increases the strafe speed which makes it really good for clearing out a building or rushing a team after getting a knock or two. Finally, the Raider Stock brings everything together as this is key to keep it as an assault rifle. The stock lets you ADS walk faster along with increasing its sprint to fire time, which already has a 15% base increase from this update. This is essential on this weapon because you are going to be taking short-range fights with the Groza. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best Grav Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / TreyarchThe best Grav loadout bolsters the Assault Rifle’s damage and range, transforming this Warzone Season 6 weapon into a hard-hitting monster. Discover which attachments you should equip to make the strongest Grav build. As Warzone’s Season 6 Haunting Event gets underway, many players will be looking for the best Grav loadout. The Grav is the latest Assault Rifle to be released in Warzone and Black Ops Cold War, joining the new .410 Ironhide shotgun. Similar to the Galil of previous Call of Duty games, the Grav AR comes packed with a fast fire rate, high bullet velocity, decent damage, and moderate recoil. While it’s still too early to tell whether the Grav has what it takes to grab a top position amongst Warzone’s best ARs, it does pack a powerful punch. This is especially true if you use the best Grav loadout in Warzone. Make sure you use the below attachments to get an advantage in the game’s Season 6 update. Contents Best Grav loadout for Warzone – Best Grav setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Grav in Warzone – Alternative to the Grav loadout – Best Grav loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 21.3” Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: 50 Rnd – The best Grav loadout utilizes a number of meta Warzone attachments – in fact, this build will be familiar to anyone that uses Cold War ARs. First up is the Agency Suppressor. This muzzle attachment bolsters the Grav’s bullet velocity, damage range, provides vertical recoil control, and suppresses your shots. Next up is the 21.3” Task Force barrel. Not only does this attachment enhance the Grav’s bullet velocity even further, but it also provides even more recoil control and damage range. Combine this with the further recoil control from the Field Agent Grip and you have AR that is laser-accurate. Because of the steady nature of the gun, we’ve attached the Axial Arms 3x optic. After all, having a clear sight that can provide accurate shot placement across mid to long ranges is incredibly important in Warzone. Rounding things off at the bottom of the list is the 50 Rnd Magazine. Maximizing your ammo will ensure you have enough rounds to down multiple foes, while also keeping pesky reloads to a minimum. Best Grav setup (Perks & equipment) Perks and Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Bullfrog – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Our best Grav Warzone loadout class utilizes EOD and Amped. EOD greatly reduces the damage from non-killstreak explosives and fire, while Amped gives you faster weapon swap and equipment speeds. The Overkill perk enables the use of our Bullfrog loadout, which still remains one of the best SMGs in Warzone Season 6. While Overkill keeps you competitive across all engagement ranges, you’ll still want to pick up Ghost as soon as you can. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down nearby enemies and give you the tools needed to flush out nearby campers. How to unlock the Grav in Warzone In order to unlock the Grav, you’ll need to level up their Season 6 Battle Pass to Tier 31. Of course, if you don’t want to grind levels in the BP, then you can always spend CP to purchase tier skips. Read More:Warzone Season 6 map changes – The Grav weapon blueprint can also be purchased, which will instantly unlock the new AR upon purchase. Once you’ve unlocked it, be sure to use the best Grav loadout above to help dominate your foes. Alternative to the Grav loadout Just like the AMAX and the Grav, Cold War’s FARA 83 is based on the real-life Galil. While it may no longer be the top pick in Warzone Season 6, it is still capable of dishing out some decent damage. This is partly down to the gun’s methodical rate of fire and great precision, making it the perfect alternative to those that enjoy the ranged combat. Unlike the Grav, you’ll need to gun for mid-range engagements, which is great for those looking to keep their enemies at a distance. Be sure to use our best Grav loadout in Warzone Season 6 and see how it ranks amongst your favorite classes. If the Grav isn’t the weapon for you, then take a look at the rest of our meta Warzone loadouts: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Kar98k Warzone loadout | Best Stoner 63 Warzone loadout | Top 20 highest earning players

Best Warzone Grau 5.56 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionModern Warfare’s Grau 5.56 may have retaken the throne as Warzone’s best AR, and when this deadly class is kitted out with the best loadout attachments, it can rule supreme in Season 5. Despite being released back in March of 2020, the Grau still stacks up against the best ARs in Warzone. Season 5 shook up the meta, nerfing the KG M40, and AS44, while significantly buffing the old and reliable AR. With its clean ironsight, fantastic accuracy, and decent damage, the Grau is capable of melting even the most well-armored foes when combined with an optimal loadout. In order to help you get the most out of the Grau in the game’s various battle royale modes, we’ve made a lethal no recoil loadout. Contents Best Grau loadout for Warzone – Best Grau setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Grau in Warzone – Alternative Grau loadout – Best Grau loadout for Warzone Best Grau attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Tempus 26.4″ Archangel – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 60 Round Mags – As the gun stats suggest, this Grau 5.56 build is all about maximizing accuracy, range, and control. First up, is the Monolithic suppressor and Tempus 26.4″ Archangel. Both these attachments increase Grau’s damage range, while also adding recoil control and bullet velocity. This extra precision is especially useful as it allows us to use the VLK 3.0x Optic, which gives excellent magnification for mid-range engagements — an area that is important when playing on Caldera. The added sound suppression also stops you from appearing on the minimap, giving you an added element of surprise when beaming your foes. Pair this with the aiming stability/recoil control from the Commando Foregrip and you have a recipe for success. The added sound suppression also stops you from appearing on the minimap, giving you an added element of surprise when beaming your foes. Pair this with the aiming stability/recoil control from the Commando Foregrip and you have a recipe for success. Lastly, the 60 Round Mags keep your ammo levels healthy throughout even the fiercest of firefights. This ensures you can continually barrage your foes without having to rely on your secondary or ground loot during later stages of the game. Best Grau setup (Perks & equipment) First Perk: E.O.D. – Second Perk: Overkill – Third Perk: Amped – Secondary: PPSh-41 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – It’s important to mention for this class and all other Warzone loadouts that having Amped is crucial. This is because it greatly speeds up your weapon swap animation. While you could switch out Overkill for Ghost, the close-quarter kill potential offered from the PPSh-41 is just too good to give up. Having this top-tier SMG in your back pocket alongside the Grau will make you a force to be reckoned with. Meanwhile, the first perk can either be E.O.D. or Double Time. E.O.D. is great at keeping you safe from enemy explosives, while Double Time enables you to tear across Caldera at breakneck speed. Of course, these perks will largely depend on personal preference, but these are statistically the best choices. How to unlock the Grau in Warzone In order to add the Grau to your arsenal, you’ll need to eliminate five players with an assault rifle in a minute, 25 times. This challenge is not easy to pull off in Warzone, particularly when many of your opponents will be kitted out with armor plates. Instead, it’s best to head on over to standard multiplayer where you can take advantage of the quicker TTK. Smaller maps like Shipment will also help speed this process up even further, so consider waiting for these maps to appear in your playlist. Alternative Grau loadout The Grau is known for its hyper-aggressive playstyle thanks to its incredibly fast ADS, decent mobility, and highly precise firing pattern. This makes it particularly potent in close-to-mid-range firefights. If you want something with a little more range, the KG M40 may be the weapon for you. While the KG M40 may have recently received a nerf its overall damage and ease of use are currently unparalleled in Warzone. You can check out our best KG M40 loadout right here. So, there you have it, the best Grau loadout you can use in Warzone. Make sure to check out our Call of Duty page and guides below for all the latest updates Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Bren Loadout | Cooper Carbine Loadout

Best Gorenko Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Thanks to Call of Duty: Warzone’s ever-changing meta, the Gorenko Sniper Rifle has come back into the fold in Season 5. So here’s our best Gorenko Warzone loadout with the perfect class setup. Since its introduction in Season 1, the Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle has been overshadowed by the Kar98k and Swiss K31 — like every other Sniper Rifle in Warzone. However, the times are a-changing as sniper rifles received a substantial buff in Season 5. Several obvious candidates have come to the fore, one of them being the Gorenko. As an Anti-Tank rifle, there’s no questioning the weapon’s stopping power and overall damage capabilities. To make it even more accurate and consistent, we’ve put together this top loadout for it. Contents Best Gorenko Warzone loadout: Attachments – Best Gorenko Warzone Class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the Gorenko in Warzone – Alternative to the Gorenko Warzone loadout – Best Gorenko Warzone loadout: Attachments Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: 420mm Empress – Optic: 1913 Variable 4-8x – Stock: Reinforced Stock – Underbarrel: GF-59 Flashlight – Magazine: 13mm AM 10 Round Mags – Ammunition: FMJ Rounds – Rear Grip: Leather Grip – Perk: Focus – Perk 2: On-Hand – To make the Gorenko as good as it can be in Warzone, we’ve started off with the Mercury Silencer as it offers much-needed suppression, and the 420mm Empress barrel improves the gun’s ADS and overall speed characteristics. The 1913 Variable 4-8x optic is perfect for controlling our zoom, whereas the Reinforced Stock and GF-59 Flashlight are instrumental as they help the gun’s accuracy and speed, and help to reveal enemies ahead of you much more clearly. We like the 13mm AM 10 Round Mags as they give us enough in the clip in case we need reserves, the FMJ Rounds are essential for that extra stopping power, and the Leather Grip gives a massive boost to ADS which is critical if you spot an enemy in Caldera and you want to get your shots in quicker. To round off this Gorenko loadout, we’re really feeling Focus for the first Perk as if we do get hit and we’re still aiming, we can lock on quickly enough to end the battle there and then. For Perk 2, On-Hand is an easy one as it reduces the weapon’s ADS time. Best Gorenko Warzone Class: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: Cold-Blooded – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Armagurra 43 – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – You would be surprised how many players are still using Cold-Blooded in Warzone, so we recommend the Perk because if an enemy sniper has Combat Scout then they’ll know your whereabouts if they hit you. For the Perk 2 slot, Overkill allows us to run around with an Armaguerra 43 for increased mobility and better combat efficiency in a close-range encounter. Amped makes it so that if we do need to switch to our MP40 ASAP we can do so. In terms of Equipment, we recommend you sport some Thermite to sniff out hiding enemies and even kill them if you stick them with one, and the Heartbeat Sensor is still a tried and tested piece of equipment. How to unlock the Gorenko in Warzone Originally an unlock for owners of the Season 1 Battle Pass, Warzone players can now unlock the gun by doing the following: “Using Sniper Rifles, get 10 single-shot eliminations in 15 different completed matches.” Bear in mind you MUST complete the match and see it through to its completion for the kills to count. Once you’ve satisfied the criteria the gun will be yours and you can use the Gorenko to your heart’s content. Alternative to the Gorenko Warzone loadout Not happy with the Gorenko? That’s not a problem. We would also highly recommend giving the ZRG 20mm or HDR a go in CoD Warzone. Other Sniper Rifles have been given a new lease of life thanks to Warzone Season 3, so either of these might serve you well. For more Warzone guides and content, check these out: Best Warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players | Call of Duty Warzone Mobile: Everything we know | What is Sabotage Contract in Warzone? | How to level up Vanguard weapons fast for Warzone

Best Gorenko CoD Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup Activision/Sledgehammer GamesThe best Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle can reward you with plenty of kills in Vanguard, especially when you use this lethal loadout. CoD Vanguard Season 1 is finally here, which means players can finally get their hands on the Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle. This incredibly powerful Sniper packs an incredible punch and has the ability to kill enemies with just one shot. While the Gorenko may have a lot of recoil, it is currently the most powerful Sniper in the game. Not only does it come pack with a fairly fast rate of fire, this beefy Sniper Rifle absolutely tears through enemies. Snipers have had a pretty tricky time in CoD Vanguard, but it’s looking like the Gorenko could change this. If you’re looking to get a competitive edge in CoD Vanguard Season 1, then our best Gorenko loadout will reward you with plenty of kills. Contents Best Gorenko Anti-Tank Sniper Rifle Vanguard loadout – Best Gorenko Anti-Tank Sniper Rifle Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the Gorenko Anti-Tank Sniper Rifle in Vanguard – Alternatives to Gorenko Anti-Tank Sniper Rifle Vanguard loadout – Best Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: 240MM ZAC Rapid – Stock: ZAC Custom Precision – Underbarrel: GF-59 Flashlight – Magazine: 13MM AM 10 Round Mags – Ammo Type: FMJ Rounds – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Focus – Kit: Fully Loaded – The best Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle loadout is tailored around boosting the gun’s accuracy and ammo count. First up on the list is the F8 Stabilizer muzzle and ZAC Custom Precision stock. Both of these attachments greatly increase the Gorenko’s accuracy, while also adding damage and reducing recoil. Meanwhile, Focus keeps your shots on target even when you’re being hit by enemy fire. This greatly reduces any frustrating deaths that come from flinching. ADS speed is also incredibly important, especially in Vanguard, where the smaller maps require a quick trigger finger. Fortunately, the 240MM ZAC Rapid and Fabric Grip boost ADS and movement speed, which enables you to quickly zap onto your target’s head. Running out of ammo with your primary can prove troublesome in Vanguard, so we’ve kitted the Gorenko out with the 13MM AM 10 Round Mags. Not only does this give you the maximum amount of rounds, but the addition of Fully Loaded will also ensure you never run into ammo issues. Adding to this is the FMJ Rounds. These bullets come with added penetration, which enables you to shoot through walls and kill enemies that are hiding behind cover. Lastly, the GF-59 Flashlight makes spotting enemies easier, highlighting their nameplates across larger distances. Best Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Forward Intel – Perk 3: Tactician – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: No 69 Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Tactical Insertion – The best Gorenko loadout uses Ghost, Forward Intel, and Tactician as its perk choices. Just like previous CoD titles, Ghost keeps you hidden from Spy Planes and enemy equipment, which enables you to stealthily take down your foes. Next up is Forward Intel. This perk is arguably the most powerful in the game as it enables you to instantly gain knowledge on enemy locations without running any reconnaissance killstreaks. Read More: Best Warzone settings on PC to increase FPS – Tactician enables you to resupply your No 69 Stun Grenade. This can prove invaluable in close-quarter scenarios or when you need to make a quick getaway. Due to the slower fire rate of the Gorenko Anti-Tank Sniper Rifle, you’ll want to pick Machine Pistol as your Secondary. This deadly pistol comes pack with a fast rate of fire and decent accuracy, making it highly reliable in close-range scenarios. Lastly, Tactical Insertion enables you to instantly spawn at your previous location, which can be incredibly useful if you wish to get back to a advantageous spot. How to unlock the Gorenko Anti-Tank Sniper Rifle in Vanguard In order to unlock the Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle in CoD Vanguard, you’ll need to reach Tier 31 in the Battle Pass. This can be done by playing Vanguard or Warzone’s multiplayer, so it shouldn’t take too long. Of course, if you don’t wish to grind out levels on the Battle Pass, then you can always purchase some premium skips instead. This will provide you with instant access to the new gun, giving you time to instantly start leveling it up. As soon as you’ve hit Tier 31 in the Season 1 Battle Pass, the Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle will be yours to equip across Warzone and Vanguard. Alternatives to Gorenko Anti-Tank Sniper Rifle Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for a quick sniper rifle that can net you plenty of kills, then the Kar98k is another good option. While it may not deal as much damage as the Gorenko, the added mobility and overall quickness make it extremely reliable. Read More: Warzone & Vanguard Season 1 Battle Pass – Just like its Warzone counterpart, the Vanguard iteration has quickly become a popular pick amongst CoD Sniper fans. Be sure to check out our best CoD Vanguard Kar98k loadout to get the most out of this rifle. So, there you have it, the best Gorenko loadout that can eliminate your foes in just a single shot. Make sure you check out our other Vanguard loadout guides to get a competitive edge on the battlefield: Best SVT-40 loadout | Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout | Best DP27 loadout | Best Type 11 loadout | Best Bren loadout | Best 3-Line Rifle loadout Best NZ-41 | Best Einhorn Revolving | Best BAR loadout | Best M1 Garand loadout | Best Volkssturmgewehr

Best Gallo SA12 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionBlack Ops Cold War’s Gallo SA12 is the most popular shotgun in Warzone due to its lethality at close range, but you’ll need a top-tier loadout to get the most out of the weapon. With such a huge arsenal of weapons to choose from, Warzone players can constantly change up their loadouts if they wish. However, it’s usually best to stick with a meta build if you want to maximize your win rate. While Vanguard’s deadly Cooper Carbine and hard-hitting Bren are the go-to guns for players looking to compete in medium to long-range gunfights, they lack firepower at close quarters. That’s why some of the community have been running the fan-favorite Gallo SA12. This Cold War shotgun can one-shot an opponent looking to rush your position, and can easily out-damage any SMG in an enclosed space. Of course, to get the most out of the weapon you’ll need to run a meta loadout, and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Gallo SA12 Warzone loadout – Best Gallo SA12 Warzone class – How to unlock the Gallo SA12 in Warzone – Alternative to the Gallo SA12 Warzone loadout – Best Gallo SA12 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Agency Choke – Barrel: 21.4 Reinforced Heavy – Laser: Ember Sighting Point – Stock: No Stock – Magazine: STANAG 12 Rnd Tube – For starters, you’re going to want to run the Agency Choke in the muzzle slot for sound suppression, vertical recoil control, and most importantly, bullet velocity. After that, equip the 21.4″ Reinforced Heavy for the increased fire rate and damage range, allowing you to get off an extra shot just in case you don’t one-shot your opponent. Next, run the Ember Sighting Point so you don’t have to waste any time ADSing, and don’t forget the No Stock attachment for the extra mobility just in case you’re chasing down an enemy. Finally, make sure to round off the loadout with the STANAG 12 Rnd Tube so you can take out an entire squad without having to reload. This is especially useful when you’re holding down a position and a whole team is aggressively pushing to take you down. Best Gallo SA12 Warzone class Perks & Equipment When it comes to perks, our Gallo SA12 setup runs the typical meta choice with E.O.D to protect you from explosive damage, as well as Amped to make it easier to switch to your AR for medium-range skirmishes. Next, you’ll definitely want to run Overkill with this class as the Gallo SA12 may pack-a-punch at short-range, but you’ll need your favorite AR alongside you for when opponents attempt to take you down from a distance. We recommend the Cooper Carbine as it’s currently the most popular AR in the game and tears down enemies at long-range. Finally, finish off the class with a Semtex to clear out enemies from cover and a Stim for a boost of health in the middle of a skirmish. How to unlock the Gallo SA12 in Warzone Unlocking the Gallo SA12 is incredibly simple in Warzone and doesn’t require players to complete any complicated challenges. All you need to do is reach level 34 and the powerful shotgun will be yours to customize. Luckily, that should only take you a few hours of matches, but remember, you’ll still have to collect all of the individual attachments. Alternative to the Gallo SA12 Warzone loadout If the Gallo SA12 isn’t the shotgun for you, then it may be time to pick up a classic choice from the days of Modern Warfare and go with the JAK-12. Another option that deals serious damage at close-range, you can’t go wrong with this weapon in an enclosed space. Capable of eliminating enemies in an instant, check out our dedicated guide if you’re looking for the meta build. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page.

Best Gallo SA12 loadout for Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War Activision / TreyarchThe Gallo SA12 packs a real punch in close-quarter engagements, making it the perfect companion for almost every loadout. These attachments not only help increase your kill potential, they also make the Gallo SA12 incredibly easy to use. The Gallo SA12 (SPAS-12) has been a fan-favorite ever since Modern Warfare 2 hit our screens back in 2009. This semi-auto shotgun is capable of dishing out some truly dizzying damage numbers, particularly when you use the loadout below. While it may not have the range of the Krig 6 or AUG loadouts, it does have fantastic kill potential in close-quarter firefights. With its high rate of fire and fantastic hip fire accuracy, the Gallo SA12 is a great gun to use. If you’re after a snappy secondary that can melt multiple foes in a single clip, then be sure to copy this Gallo SA12 loadout for yourself. Best Gallo SA12 loadout Here are the best attachments you can use on your Gallo SA12 in Black Ops Cold War: Attachments Muzzle: Duckbill Choke – Barrel: 21.4” Reinforced Heavy – Body: SWAT 5MW Laser Sight – Magazine: STANAG 12 Round Tube – Stock: Wire Stock – Perks Flak Jacket – Scavenger – Ninja – Equipment Tactical: Stimshot – Lethal: Grenade – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – Wildcard Danger Close – The loadout for the best Gallo SA12 is pretty simple. First up is the Duckbill Choke. This muzzle widens the shotgun’s pellet spread, allowing you to catch multiple enemies in the pellet radius. It also makes hip firing even more viable as you don’t have to ADS in order to remain accurate. Unlike the Hauer 77, the Gallo SA12 has a much faster rate of fire thanks to it being semi-auto. As a result, this loadout utilizes the 21.4” Reinforced Heavy to complement this aspect of the gun. Not only does the 21.4” Reinforced Heavy bolster the Gallo’s effective damage range, but it also drastically increases its fire rate. While you still won’t be able to effectively kill targets outside of any close-quarter ranges, the increased fire rate will keep you competitive against the likes of the MP5 and Milano 821. Having attachments that bolster a gun’s ADS speed is usually the desired route to take, but the nature of the Gallo’s bullet spread enables us to focus purely on hip fire instead. The SWAT 5MW Laser Sight is the perfect addition as it increases hip fire accuracy by a massive 35%. Rounding things off at the bottom of the attachment list is the STANAG 12 Round Tube and Wire Stock. The STANAG 12 Round Tube greatly enhances the amount of ammo the Gallo SA12 can carry. This is particularly important given the gun’s fire rate and two-shot kill potential. Meanwhile, the Wire Stock adds a small 10% increase to sprint to fire speed, enabling you to aggressively close the gap and barrage your enemies with lethal buckshot. It’s a pretty simple build, but one that works wonders, particularly on the game’s smaller maps. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best FTAC Siege Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionSeason 3 Reloaded introduced a new sidearm in the form of the FTAC Siege. In order to maximize the Tec-9-inspired pistol’s potential, we’ve put together the best FTAC Siege loadout for you to use in Warzone 2. Activision claimed the FTAC Siege boasts a “jaw-dropping” fire rate and “rapid” swap speed, perfect for a secondary weapon. Most Warzone 2 players use the Overkill perk, allowing them to carry two primary weapons, but this may finally provide a reliable sidearm to use. The developers admitted the pistol won’t be a true substitute for a primary SMG but argued: “This fast firing secondary is a boon in close-quarters situations and can push the limits of a sidearm’s range.” Without further ado, let’s jump right into the best FTAC Siege loadout. Contents Best FTAC Siege Warzone 2 loadout – Best FTAC Siege Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the FTAC Siege in Warzone 2 – Best FTAC Siege companion weapon in Warzone 2 – Best FTAC Siege Warzone 2 loadout Muzzle: XTEN RR-40 (-0.68, +0.55) – Barrel: CMRN-50 (+0.24, +0.25) – Magazine: 50 Round Mag – Rear Grip: SUR-160 (-0.45, -0.23) – Stock: FTAC Siege Stock (-1.81, -1.24) – The FTAC Siege suffers severe damage dropoff, so it won’t be as reliable as an SMG, yet it still shreds enemies up close. Our loadout brings the pistol as close to an SMG as possible. We opted to use the SUR-160 Stock as it increases sprint to fire and ADS speed and tuned it to maximize those attributes. The FTAC Siege Stock decreases mobility while improving aiming stability and recoil control, but we tuned it for mobility. Infinity Ward decreased the ADS and movement speed penalties for using a large magazine in the Season 3 Reloaded update. With that in mind, using the 50-round Mag is less punishing. And finally, the XTEN RR-40 and CMRN-50 both increase recoil control and damage range. Best FTAC Siege Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Best Perks Base Perk: Scavenger – Base Perk: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Fast hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – There are a couple of different avenues you can take when choosing perks. The most contentious selection will be the Ultimate Perk. A lot of players choose High Alert, as it gives you a vision pulse when an enemy spots you. However, we expect Ghost to be more useful as it makes players undetectable by UAVs, Portable Radars, and Heartbeat Sensors. Fast Hands should be a no-brainer choice since it makes reloading, using equipment, and swapping weapons faster. This perk could save your life in a gunfight against a skilled opponent. As for the Base Perk slots, we decided to go with Double Time and Scavenger to maximize the ability to escape gunfights and replenish ammo. Best Equipment Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Players should select a throwing knife or drill charge for their lethal choice. Throwing knives make it easier to finish downed enemies without wasting ammunition, while drill charges are great for taking out campers. As for the tactical slot, players shouldn’t look further than the smoke grenade. Using smoke to move between cover at the end of matches or rotate to a new circle is a game-changer. How to unlock the FTAC Siege in Warzone 2 Players can unlock the FTAC Siege by getting 50 sidearm hip-fire operator kills using handguns. Additionally, players can simply purchase the weapon with real money via a Store Bundle. Best FTAC Siege companion weapon in Warzone 2 Instead of offering an alternative weapon, as usual, it makes more sense to recommend a companion weapon. The FTAC Siege is a secondary weapon with limitations holding it back from being used alone. The Lachmann 556 received a major buff in the Season 3 Reloaded weapon balancing update, making it an easy choice for a reliable primary weapon to pair with the FTAC Siege.

Best FTAC Siege MW2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks The FTAC Siege is a fully automatic handgun added in Modern Warfare 2 Season 3 Reloaded. If you’re looking for a top-tier setup to dominate with we’ve got just the thing, here’s our best FTAC Siege loadout in MW2. Introduced in Season 3 Reloaded, the FTAC Siege is a full auto pistol based on the real world TEC-9. This fast firing secondary first made its debut in the Call of Duty franchise during Black Ops Cold War. The FTAC Siege is a machine pistol with an extremely high fire rate and a lethal TTK at close range. Thanks to its access to some enormous magazine attachments it works well as a makeshift SMG and can be a useful weapon to partner with a sniper, LMG, or long range AR. Here’s the best loadout for the FTAC Siege, including the attachments, perks, and equipment to use. Contents Best FTAC Siege MW2 Loadout – Best FTAC Siege MW2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the FTAC Siege in MW2 – Best FTAC Siege alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best FTAC Siege MW2 Loadout Attachments Barrel: STF-U – Stock: FTAC Folder – Underbarrel: Wedge Grip – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Rear Grip: FTAC Stead – Although the FTAC Siege can perform well as a pistol it’s best to instead build it as a SMG. The Siege’s ability to be built as a powerful SMG makes it unique amongst secondaries and is certainly worth taking advantage of. Its main weaknesses are its lack of range and significant vertical recoil. To help with both it’s best to use the STF-U barrel alongside the FTAC Stead rear grip. These make it easier to stay on target whilst firing but avoid slowing down the gun’s handling too much keeping the Siege feeling snappy. Continuing the theme of making the Siege more accurate it’s also recommended to use the FTAC Folder stock. This stock not only improves recoil control and aiming stability but also makes us more mobile by improving sprint speed and crouch movement speed. The FTAC Siege’s unique Wedge Grip is another great choice as it improves aiming stability and hip fire accuracy with very few downsides. Finally, the 50 Round Drum arms the Siege with more than enough bullets to secure multiple kills in quick succession without having to reload. Best FTAC Siege MW2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Snapshot Grenade – With the FTAC Siege being a primarily close range weapon it’s important that you can effectively close the gap on enemies. Double Time and Tracker are excellent for this as the former lets you sprint for longer periods while the latter makes nearby enemies easier to pursue. Spotter works well to compliment an aggressive playstyle as it will highlight dangerous lethal equipment. This should help you avoid running into a Proximity Mine or Cluster Mine by accident. For the Ultimate Perk, Ghost is the best choice as it keeps you off the radar from UAVs and Heartbeat Sensors. It can be difficult to move around freely without Ghost as enemy players will know where you are coming from. Although an explosive alternative can work too, a Throwing Knife is a superb choice for Lethal Equipment. It provides a one shot kill option for when you need to reload or get caught off guard. As for tactical, Snapshot Grenades are useful for quickly scanning an area and locating enemy players. How to unlock the FTAC Siege in MW2 The FTAC Siege can be unlocked in MW2 by getting 50 Operator Kills using handguns. This challenge was added in Season 3 Reloaded alongside the FTAC Siege. Alternatively, successfully extracting in DMZ with an FTAC Siege will also unlock the automatic pistol. This can either be looted from another player or dropped by a friend who has already unlocked the FTAC Siege Best FTAC Siege alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 For a different take on a fast firing handgun players can either use the X13 Auto or GS Magna. The X13 is more of a traditional pistol while the GS Magna is a powerhouse hand cannon. Alternatively, the FTAC Siege could be swapped out for an SMG that excels at close range like the Fennec 45 or BAS-P. That’s all for our FTAC Siege loadout! For more of our MW2 & Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best FTAC Recon Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks With the rise of the Cronen Squall in Season 3, alternatives like the FTAC Recon aren’t given much of a chance. Despite not being the most popular gun, the FTAC Recon is a monster up close. Here’s our loadout for Warzone 2’s FTAC Recon, including the best attachments, perks, and equipment. At launch, battle rifles were largely overlooked being treated as the unwanted middle ground between assault rifles and marksman rifles. However, during Season 1 players quickly figured out that the TAQ-V was one of the best guns in Warzone 2. Following the TAQ-V’s rise other battle rifles like the Cronen Squall have also become popular, but it’s the FTAC Recon that is arguably Warzone 2’s most underrated weapon. The idea of a close range semi-auto rifle might not appeal to everyone but in the right hands, this battle rifle can outgun even the best SMGs in close quarters. To help you get the most out of it, we’ve put together the perfect FTAC Recon loadout to dominate on both Al Mazrah and Ashika Island. Contents Best FTAC Recon Warzone 2 loadout – Best FTAC Recon Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the FTAC Recon in Warzone 2 – Best FTAC Recon alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best FTAC Recon Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: XRK Kraken – Laser: Corio LAZ-44 V3 – Optic: SZ Recharge-DX – Stock: Demo Fade Pro Stock – Magazine: 15 Round Mag – Our FTAC Recon loadout focuses on reducing its significant vertical recoil whilst not slowing down the battle rifle too much. After all, this gun is best used in close quarters so destroying its ADS or sprint to fire speed would defeat the point of it. To reduce recoil we use the XRK Kraken which is by far the best muzzle attachment for the FTAC Recon. Combine this with a good optic like the SZ Recharge-DX makes staying on target whilst shooting much easier which is important when using a precision semi-auto weapon. The 15 Round Mag is a must in Warzone 2 as downing and thirsting a player can burn through a full magazine. Due to this, the FTAC Recon is best used in Solos and Duos where the constant reloading is less likely to get you in trouble. Since all three equipped attachments slow down the FTAC Recon it’s best to use the Corio LAZ-44 V3 laser and Demo Fade Pro Stock to increase mobility. The laser improves ADS and aiming stability while the stock ups movement speed and strafe speed. Best FTAC Recon Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – The Overkill Base Perk lets you cover the FTAC Recon’s weaknesses. This battle rifle only excels up to around 30 meters so you’ll want to partner it with a well rounded, accurate assault rifle or LMG like the ISO Hemlock or Sakin MG38. Since the FTAC Recon is at its best up close you’ll be running around the map a lot to chase down other teams. Double Time is perfect for this as it doubles your tactical sprint duration. As an added bonus, it also increases crouch movement speed by 30% which is fantastic for sneaking around. Due to its small magazine size, you’ll be reloading a lot with the FTAC Recon. Given this, Fast Hands is a natural choice as it makes the battle rifle’s reload time extremely fast. For the Ultimate Perk, High Alert is a superb option as it lets you react to players aiming at you from behind. To take advantage of the FTAC Recon’s awesome TTK getting the first shot off is essential and High Alert assists in that. The best Lethal equipment to use is a Throwing Knife. Being able to finish downed players without having to waste shots helps prevent the FTAC Recon’s smaller magazine from becoming too problematic. For Tactical, Smoke Grenades can be used to produce impromptu cover when crossing open areas. How to unlock the FTAC Recon in Warzone 2 To unlock the FTAC Recon in Warzone 2 all you have to do is level up the M4 assault rifle to level 13. Keep in mind that you’ll also need to level it up to Level 23 if you want to have access to all the battle rifle’s unique attachments and weapon tuning. Best FTAC Recon alternatives in Warzone 2 With it being a close range semi-auto weapon, the FTAC Recon stands alone with nothing else being comparable. However, the Cronen Squall is another battle rifle that kills equally fast if you can manage its recoil. Alternatively, a powerful SMG like the Vaznev-9K or Lachmann Sub can fulfill the same role, offering great mobility and a fast TTK up close. That’s all for our FTAC Recon loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best FTAC Recon MW2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s FTAC Recon battle rifle is capable of doing impressive damage to enemies at mid-range. But you’ll need to use the best loadout in order to achieve that famed damage. Despite there being plenty of powerful weapons in Modern Warfare 2, many players tend to opt for the guns they already know and love, like the M4 or the M16. However, that means there are powerful weapons falling under the radar, meaning the possibility of high damage is missed. The FTAC Recon battle rifle is that missed opportunity for high damage. Most players pick it up, fire, and feel the recoil and stability outweigh the damage. However, with the right loadout, you can keep it stable and fantastically powerful. Here’s the best FTAC Recon loadout for Modern Warfare 2. Contents Best FTAC Recon Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best FTAC Recon Modern Warfare 2 class & Perks – How to unlock FTAC Recon in Modern Warfare 2 – Best alternatives to FTAC Recon in Modern Warfare 2 – Best FTAC Recon Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Shred CP90 Compensator – Barrel: Bull Rider 16.5 Barrel – Underbarrel: Forge-TAC Ripper 56 – Stock: Demo Precision Elite Factory – Rear Grip: LM Cronus Grip – Receiver: FTAC Recon – To really get the most out of the FTAC Recon in this fast-paced game, we recommend opting for the Shred CP90 Compensator muzzle to keep your recoil at a minimum while still prioritizing the battle rifle’s higher damage. Next, we chose to opt for the Bull Rider 16.5 Barrel for a bit more range and bullet velocity, making the FTAC Recon great at close, mid, and relatively far distances. Although it’s not recommended you go too far. Then, we recommend using the Forge-TAC Ripper 56 on the gun’s underbarrel. This allows you to be a little more accurate with hip fire and enhances aiming idle stability and your recoil. The Forge-TAC Ripper 56 underbarrel pairs well with the Demo Precision Elite Factory Stock which also helps increase your overall stability and recoil control, pivotal for making every shot count. Lastly, one of the best Rear Grips to add to the FTAC Recon is the LM Cronus Grip. The main perk provided by the LM Cronus Grip is its flinch resistance and stability. With a battle rifle like this one, you need all the stability you can get. Best FTAC Recon Modern Warfare 2 class & Perks Base Perk 1: Battle Hardened – Base Perk 2: Scavenger – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Modern Warfare 2 has a brand new Perk system that introduces pre-made packages. While they’re useful, we recommend you build your own if you want to make the best FTAC Recon loadout. To start, for the two available Base Perks, we recommend using Battle Hardened and Scavenger to help you keep a steady supply of ammo while staying immune to stuns, gas, EMPs, and more. As for the Bonus Perk, since you’ll be staying on the sidelines with the FTAC Recon, we suggest using Spotter to help eliminate any unnecessary team deaths from field Upgrades and Killstreaks. When it comes to the Ultimate Perk, one of the best choices is Ghost. This perk will keep you tucked away from the enemy radar and let you get the drop on them. Equipment is relatively personal but we recommend Semtex and Flash Grenades to deal easy damage and keep the enemy confused on certain objective modes. How to unlock FTAC Recon in Modern Warfare 2 You can’t unlock the FTAC Recon by leveling up in Modern Warfare, instead, you will need to level up a different gun before being able to use this battle rifle. As a part of the M4 weapon tree, you need to get the M4 up to level 13. Once you’ve done this, the FTAC Recon will become available. Best alternatives to FTAC Recon in Modern Warfare 2 While the FTAC Recon is undeniably powerful, it’s rather slow and the stability leaves much to be desired which can be frustrating for some players. If you’re looking for some versatility and power, the Lachmann-556 is a great alternative. That’s the best FTAC Recon loadout you can use in Modern Warfare 2. While leveling up the M4, take a look at some of our other Modern Warfare 2 guides: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best FSS Hurricane Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThere are a lot of good choices to pick from when it comes to SMGs but the FSS Hurricane is often overlooked despite being so strong. Here’s our best FSS Hurricane loadout in Warzone 2, complete with attachments, Perks, and equipment. The FSS Hurricane is an SMG based on the real world AR-57. It’s effectively an M4 that has been converted to take P90 magazines resulting in its huge default 50 round magazine. Its large magazine and impressive mobility make the FSS Hurricane a good choice for aggressive playstyles and getting up close and personal. It can be a little underrated compared to other SMGs but when used with the right loadout the Hurricane can dominate. We’ve put together the best FSS Hurricane loadout in Warzone 2, including the ideal attachments, Perks, and equipment. Contents Best FSS Hurricane Warzone 2 loadout – Best FSS Hurricane Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the FSS Hurricane in Warzone 2 – Best FSS Hurricane alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best FSS Hurricane Warzone 2 loadout Muzzle: Bruen Pendulum – Laser: Corio LAZ-44 V3 – Underbarrel: Schlager Tango – Ammunition: 5.7x27mm Armor Piercing – Rear Grip: Xten Grip – The focus of this FSS Hurricane loadout is to make this SMG as accurate as possible to take advantage of its high bullet velocity. Despite being an SMG its fantastic bullet velocity and low recoil make the Hurricane capable of winning mid-range gunfights against assault rifles if built correctly. The two attachments used to minimize recoil are the Bruen Pendulum muzzle and Schlager Tango underbarrel. These mostly reduce vertical recoil whilst also slightly decreasing side to side bounce. To keep the FSS Hurricane feeling fast and like an SMG it’s best to use the Corio LAZ-44 V3. This is preferred over the FSS OLE-V Laser as it’s much less visible after the Season 3 nerf. The Xten Grip combines well with the laser to greatly reduce sprint to fire time. The last attachment isn’t as important but the 5.7x27mm Armor Piercing rounds let the FSS Hurricane shoot through walls which can be useful when trying to finish off a fleeing enemy. Some players may prefer to use a close range optic like the Cronen Mini Pro instead. Best FSS Hurricane Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – With the FSS Hurricane being an SMG it tends to struggle at long range so you are going to want another gun to cover that weakness. To achieve this use Overkill and partner the Hurricane with either a long range assault rifle, LMG, or sniper. Naturally, with an SMG you’ll be running around a lot and so using Double Time to speed up that movement is a must. Also, Spotter is a great Bonus Perk to have as it lets you spot enemy equipment and avoid being downed by a concealed proximity mine or cluster mine. For Ultimate Perk, it’s recommended to use High Alert as the intel it provides is invaluable. Being told when another player is aiming at you gives you the opportunity to react, get to cover, and avoid getting killed. Since this build is focused on aggression using a Drill Charge is a good choice as they can pass through walls and force stationary players to move. For tactical equipment, Smoke Grenades are excellent as they can provide impromptu cover when running in the open. How to unlock the FSS Hurricane in Warzone 2 To unlock the FSS Hurricane in Warzone 2, you’ll first need to use the FTAC Recon until it reaches Level 16. Due to how this year’s Gunsmith system works, you’ll first need to get the M4 to Level 13 to get hold of the FTAC Recon. Best FSS Hurricane alternatives in Warzone 2 An obvious alternative to the FSS Hurricane is the SMG that it’s based on, the PDSW 528. The PDSW offers superior mobility at the cost of harder to control recoil. Those looking for a more traditional SMG should consider the Vaznev-9K which still performs well at medium range whilst dominating up close. That’s all for our FSS Hurricane loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best FSS Hurricane Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks ActivisionThe FSS Hurricane is one of Modern Warfare 2’s best SMGs, but only if it has the best loadout. Here’s the best FSS Hurricane loadout in MW2, complete with attachments, Perks, and equipment. In years gone by, an amazing SMG loadout can rip opponents to bits in no time at all, like the MP5. Similarly, the FSS Hurricane can also drop big numbers during a game of Call of Duty: Modern Warfare 2. Some of the game’s maps have some intense, close-quarters sections that are suited perfectly to the Hurricane’s strengths. If you want to run around at great speed with the ferocious FSS Hurricane in Modern Warfare 2, then you need our best loadout for the weapon. Contents Best FSS Hurricane Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best FSS Hurricane Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the FSS Hurricane in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the FSS Hurricane Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best FSS Hurricane Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: FSS Cannonade 16″ Barrel – Muzzle: XTEN Razor Comp – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple Vert Grip – Rear Grip: Saxin ZX Grip – Stock: Demo Fade Pro Stock – Receiver: FSS Hurricane – The best Hurricane loadout in the game starts off with the FSS Cannonade 16″ Barrel as it simply adds a ton of firepower and range to the weapon, an unbelievable positive as it’s an SMG after all. For the Muzzle, we recommended the XTEN Razor Comp as it’s the quintessential accuracy booster with adjustments made to both horizontal and vertical recoil. While the VX Pineapple Vert Grip is not only a great name, but it greatly increases overall gun control and hip fire accuracy for the Hurricane. We’ve gone for the Saxin ZX Grip next as we’re happy sacrificing a bit of stability for even more recoil control, turning the FSS Hurricane into a laser by this point, and the Demo Fade Pro Stock decreases its recoil more so. Best FSS Hurricane Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Stim – Tracker can be instrumental in landing easy kills as it allows you to follow the footsteps of unsuspecting enemies. On the other hand, Battle Hardened turns you into a walking tank that can pretty much nullify the effects of any thrown equipment — including those positon-revealing Snapshot Grenades. It’s quite easy to get caught up with an SMG and unload a ton of bullets in no time at all, so Fast Hands is useful for getting the next clip in ASAP. As for your Ultimate, it’s a tricky one, but Ghost is an option you can’t go wrong with due to its concealment potential. A Proximity Mine can either be a one-shot-kill device or even just a way of knowing an enemy is close, so we recommend that as your Lethal, whereas the Stim retains its healing properties that players have come to love over the years to get you straight back into a fight. How to unlock the FSS Hurricane in Modern Warfare 2 In order to get your hands on this excellent SMG in Modern Warfare 2, you’ll need to level up the M4 to Level 13 to unlock the FTAC Recon, once you’ve done that, use the FTAC Recon until it reaches Level 16, and you should unlock the FSS Hurricane Receiver after doing this! The concept of Gunsmith’s Receivers has thrown some players off, but once you understand the idea then the system becomes a piece of cake. Here’s a quick rundown: Equip the M4 Assault Rifle – Use it until it reaches Level 13 – Now, equip the FTAC Recon in a loadout – Play games of Modern Warfare 2 with it until it reaches Level 16 – You can now equip the FSS Hurricane Reciever! – Alternative to the FSS Hurricane Modern Warfare 2 loadout Even early in Modern Warfare 2, the game has provided players with plenty of solid options to take down opposition teams, so if the Hurricane isn’t your jam, try out the M4 or the FTAC Recon. The M4 is your prototypical Assault Rifle with balanced stats and enough attachments to be customized to your liking. On the other hand, the FTAC Recon is a bludgeoning Battle Rifle with a small ammo clip, but ridiculous power. Now that you have the best FSS Hurricane loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2| How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best FR Avancer Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe FR Avancer AR is a brand new weapon in Season 5. Here’s everything you need to know about the meta loadouts, perks, and attachments for the exciting AR in Warzone 2. The FR Avancer is a mix of the Famas from Black Ops 1 and the FFAR from Cold War. The AR boasts an impressive fire rate and average time-to-kill speed. JGOD did some testing and concluded that the AR has a close-range TTK of 718ms, a medium range between 849 and 914ms, and a long-range speed between 1110 and 1175ms. These estimates and an easy-to-use recoil pattern make the FR Avancer an interesting long-range option in Warzone 2. Contents Best FR Avancer Warzone 2 loadout – Best FR Avancer Warzone 2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the FR Avancer in Warzone 2 – Best FR Avancer alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best FR Avancer Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: XTEN Havoc 90 (+0.41, +0.21) – Optic: Aim OP-V4 (+1.35, -1.65) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.52, +0.26) – Barrel: 435mm FR435 (+0.31, -0.18) – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – If you want a faster theoretical TTK, players can always replace the barrel with high-velocity ammunition or use a different optic based on personal preference. A suppressor instead of the ZTEN Havoc 90 could also provide a little more range, such as the Harbinger D20, which is a fan-favorite attachment for long-range meta weapons. Best FR Avancer Warzone 2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – For Base Perks, Double Time is useful as it doubles your tactical sprint duration, making getting around both Al Mazrah and Ashika Island faster. It’s also recommended to use Overkill to run a secondary weapon. We believe that this new AR could be a great sniper support weapon. Resupply is an effective Bonus Perk, as it constantly regenerates both Equipment slots and Field Upgrades. Given the importance of equipment for pushing other teams and maneuvering, having constant access to them is fantastic. For the Ultimate Perk, High Alert is a superb choice, as it provides free intel by highlighting the direction of enemy players aiming at you from behind. With Warzone 2’s short TTK, this is one of the few ways to give yourself enough time to react before being downed. Equipment is flexible as there are several strong choices but a Drill Charge and Smoke Grenade are the top picks here. Drill Charges are excellent for flushing out players from hard-to-reach areas, while Smoke Grenades allow you to reposition through open spaces without being punished. How to unlock the FR Avancer in Warzone 2 If you’re looking to unlock the FR Avancer in Warzone 2, there are no challenges to complete. Instead, you just have to progress the Season 5 Battle Pass. The AR can be found in Sector E8, so just keep playing matches and performing well, and you’ll have it unlocked in no time. Best FR Avancer alternatives in Warzone 2 If the FR Avancer isn’t checking off every box for you, the Tempus Razorback has a similar damage profile. The easy-to-use AR also received a buff on July 24, increasing its minimum damage and limb multipliers. That’s all for our FR Avancer loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best FR Avancer Modern Warfare 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup The FR Avancer has arrived to shake up the multiplayer meta, introducing an accurate yet fast-firing AR to MW2. To help you get the most out of this weapon we’ve put together this best FR Avancer loadout guide for Modern Warfare 2. First introduced in Season 5, the FR Avancer is a bullpup assault rifle based on the real-world FAMAS. More specifically, the FÉLIN, a modified FAMAS used by the French military. This is the same firearm that Black Ops Cold War’s FFAR 1 was based on. Unlike its more recognizable cousin, the FR Avancer is a full-auto weapon with an extremely high fire rate as opposed to a burst rifle. Its raw damage is nothing special but its low recoil and high fire rate make it an easy AR to get value from. To get the most out of the FR Avancer you’ll want to have the best Modern Warfare 2 loadout possible for multiplayer, and thankfully we’ve got you covered. Contents Best FR Avancer MW2 Loadout – Best FR Avancer MW2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the FR Avancer in MW2 – Best FR Avancer alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best FR Avancer MW2 Loadout Muzzle: XTEN Ported 290 – Laser: Schlager PEQ Box IV – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Underbarrel: Edge-47 Grip – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – For the most part, the FR Avancer is a standard fast-firing assault rifle that handles similarly to most other ARs. To take advantage of its strengths it’s best to optimize the Avancer for accuracy while making sure to not hurt its handling too much. Since the FR Avancer’s recoil is almost exclusively vertical the XTEN Ported 290 muzzle is the most impactful attachment. Couple that with the Edge-47 Grip underbarrel and you’ll have a laser-accurate gun that’s remarkably easy to use. While extended magazines are generally not recommended for multiplayer the Avancer’s default 25 rounds can be difficult to play around. Given how small the handling penalty is for running the 45 Round Mag we think the value of 20 additional rounds outweighs the cons. The other attachments are largely personal preference but a clear close to medium-range optic like the Cronen Mini Pro can help keep your aim on target. Equally, the Schlager PEQ Box IV isn’t a must-have but there’s no harm in improving ADS speed where possible. Best FR Avancer MW2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal Equipment: Frag Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Snapshot Grenade – Double Time is a fantastic choice for your first Base Perk as it speeds up how fast you can move around the map, perfect for playing more aggressively. We recommend partnering that with Bomb Squad which will let you survive most incoming equipment and explosives. For Bonus Perk, Fast Hands is a good choice with the FR Avancer. This assault rifle doesn’t have the fastest reload in the world so speeding it up is a good idea to minimize the chance of you getting caught out mid-reload. As usual, Ghost is the best Ultimate Perk in Modern Warfare 2. Being able to stay off the radar while enemies spam UAVs is a must to avoid getting farmed when your team is on the back foot. You may want to tweak equipment depending on what you like using but a Frag Grenade is always a solid choice. They can be cooked to explode at the perfect moment and even kill through Bomb Squad if timed right. A Snapshot Grenade works well with this to scout areas for enemies beforehand. How to unlock the FR Avancer in MW2 To unlock the FR Avancer you’ll need to complete Sector E8 of the Season 5 Battle Pass. This will take a minimum of 25 Battle Pass Tokens to reach and finish. Players can expect an in-game challenge to be added beyond Season 5 that will let you unlock the FR Avancer once the Battle Pass has expired. Best FR Avancer alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 The M13B is another fast-firing assault rifle that excels in accuracy at the cost of raw damage. It isn’t necessarily the multiplayer meta but some players swear by its overall feel. Alternatively, the Lachmann 556 is a more meta option that doesn’t fire quite as quickly but has a competitive time to kill and is equally easy to use. That’s all for our FR Avancer loadout! For more of Modern Warfare 2 & Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best FR.56 loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare Activision / Infinity Ward[jwplayer br5AuoVJ]The FR.56, aka the Famas, is no stranger to the hectic battlefields of Modern Warfare and while it may not be the assault rifle, it can still get the job done when equipped with the right attachments. Here, we break down two of the strongest FR.56 loadouts that you can use in both Warzone and Modern Warfare. While fans of Modern Warfare 2 and Black Ops will be all too familiar with this assault rifle, the latest iteration of this iconic gun may leave a number of you disappointed. In fact, the burst fire nature of the FR.56 can make it a little hard to recommend, particularly since it gets outclassed in nearly every engagement against its semi-automatic cousins. However, with the correct setup, the FR.56 does have the potential to do rather well. In order to help you get to grips with this underused assault rifle, we’ve put together two loadouts you can equip in Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer and Warzone modes. Best FR.56 loadout for Warzone Monolithic Suppressor – FR 24.4” Sniper – Corp Combat Holo Sight – Commando Foregrip – 50 Round Mags – The burst fire nature of the FR.56 can leave you high and dry in close quarters combat, so it’s often best to make some distance between you and your enemies. As a result, this loadout is tailored around mid-range engagements. Not only does the Monolithic Suppressor keep you from popping up on the minimap when firing, it also adds to your effective damage range. As the name suggests, the FR 24.4” Sniper barrel is perfect for those long-distance firefights as it speeds up the bullet travel time, something which makes hitting mobile targets much more manageable. We’ve also attached the Corp Combat Holo Sight to help give the FR.56 a little extra boost in the accuracy department. Rounding things off at the bottom, are the Commando Foregrip and 50 Round Mags. The Commando Foregrip is a staple for most guns due its recoil stabilization, while the 50 Round Mags give you enough ammo to burst through even the most well-armored squads. You could switch in the 60 Round Mags here, but we personally don’t like the reduction in control and mobility. Best FR.56 loadout for Modern Warfare multiplayer Muzzle Compensator – FR 24.4” Sniper – Commando Foregrip – Stippled Grip Tape – Sleight of Hand – Unlike our ranged build above, this loadout is focused on giving the FR.56 the speed it needs to be competitive in close-range firefights. While it will never truly be able to compete with the likes of the ever-popular Fennec or MP5 SMGs, it will at least have a fighting chance. Both the Muzzle Compensator and FR 24.4” Sniper barrel help with recoil control and provide a significant boost to bullet velocity. While not needed on Modern Warfare’s smaller maps, the extra damage range is great for when you need to hold an angle or defend an objective from advancing enemies. Meanwhile, the Commando Foregrip and Stippled Grip Tape keep your shots precise and your movements fast, making them essential for those of you who enjoy the run and gun playstyle. Lastly, the Sleight of Hand perk reduces your chances of being caught in any lengthy reloading animations. While you could switch this out for the 50 Round Mags, the FR 56’s standard clip size is more than enough to down multiple targets in Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer. The FR.56 may not be as strong as its predecessors, but it’s still capable of dishing out a lot of damage when equipped with the right attachments. Make sure you check out all our other weapon loadout guides to ensure you’re kitting them out with the very best attachments.

Best FR.556 loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionCoD Mobile fans can finally use the Famas – FR.556 – in Season 1, New Order. So, here are some early class setups that should have you dominating games. With it’s first update of 2021, Call of Duty Mobile has reset the counter on the seasons – opting against going into Season 14, but instead, going back to Season 1 and giving it the name New Order. The new season has added a new map in the form of Reclaim, a new battle royale mode called Blitz, as well as two iconic CoD weapons – the SKS and the FR .556, otherwise known as the FAMAS. It’s early days, but players have already been getting to grips with the latter to see where it fits into in terms of the meta. And as a result, there have already been a few nice loadouts being put to the test. Best overall FAMAS loadout in CoD Mobile As anyone who has used a FAMAS in a Call of Duty before will know, it is a bit of a do it all weapon. It can be decent at long to medium range and is absolutely deadly at close range too. Read More: When does CoD Mobile Season 2 start? – It’s the same story in CoD Mobile, as the FR.556 has become of the game’s best weapons – especially if you’re someone who likes to post up at a spot and just feed on enemies. If you do, then you’ll want to get the gun leveled up enough so that you can use attachments like the Monolithic Suppressor, Granulated Grip Tape, and: Strike Foregrip. These will all play a key part in what is looking like a top-notch loadout. Muzzle: OWC Light Suppressor – Laser: OWC Laser – Tactical – Underbarrel: Strike Foregrip – Ammunition: Extended Mag A – Rear Grip: Granulated Grip Tape – Ferg’s FR.556 CoD Mobile loadout Popular CoD Mobile YouTuber Ferg has also got a setup of his own, that he’s already used to great success in getting a Nuke on Nuketown. It’s got a few tweaks to the setup above, and is perfect if you want to use one spot on the map or run around and be a nuisance. Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: OWC Ranger – Laser: OWC Laser – Tactical – Rear Grip: Granulated Grip Tape – Stock: RTC Steady Stock – To round out any class, you’ll need some grenades and perks. As ever, you can’t really go wrong with using Lightweight, Toughness, and Dead Silence as perks. As for equipment and grenades, again, the Frag Grenade is a solid choice, and you can take either the Flashbang or Concussion as your tactical. You should rack up kills if you get everything working in tandem.

Best FR 5.56 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks Burst weapons have solidified their place as good-to-great options in the Warzone meta, with the FR 5.56 leading the pack. Here’s your guide to the best FR 5.56 loadout for Season 4 Reloaded, ensuring you rack up wins effortlessly. The FAMAS has been an iconic weapon in Call of Duty for years and it returns yet again in Warzone as the FR 5.56. While it has been a strong option in multiplayer this burst rifle has typically struggled in Warzone. That is until now. Burst weapons are top-tier in the meta right now and the FR 5.56 is no exception. Its great range and accuracy make it an obvious pick in CoDs battle royale even if its lower fire rate can make it somewhat unforgiving. With the FR 5.56 being such a unique weapon it demands a very particular setup. Thankfully, we’ve got you covered with this best FR 5.56 Warzone Season 4 Reloaded loadout. Best FR 5.56 Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: 435MM FR435 – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – While the FR 5.56 can be lethal its burst does kick a lot To improve recoil and make this AR more accurate it’s recommended to use the VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor muzzle and 6435MM FR435 barrel which also provide a sizable increase to range. Keeping with the theme of accuracy, the Bruen Heavy Support Grip underbarrel will help give you better ADS Speed and reduce the horizontal recoil for the gun. However, this does come at the cost of greater vertical recoil, but that’s worth dealing with for the benefits. With the FR 5.56 being a precision weapon a suitable medium-long range sight is a must, and the Corio Eagleseye 2.5x optic offers just that. Finally, the 60 Round Mag is excellent for reducing the amount of reloading required and ensures you will have enough shots to get the job done when needed most. FR 5.56 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases the duration of Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Faster reloading – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute Gives you a speed boost when hit by enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – The best Perk 1 is Double Time as the improved Tactical Sprint provided boosts mobility letting you get around Urzikstan more easily. Partnering that with Sleight of Hand helps you keep your gun locked and loaded whenever you need to get into a fight. Quick Fix is an excellent Perk 3 with it kickstarting your health regeneration whenever you insert a plate of armor into your vest. The last Perk is Resolute, a new addition in Warzone that boosts movement speed after taking damage. This can be a real lifesaver in those tight moments when you are under fire and need to find cover as soon as possible. A Throwing Knife is a classic choice for lethal equipment as it can be thrown quickly to deal damage to down an enemy. For a more defensive option, a Smoke Grenade is a good tactical to use as it can be thrown to obscure an open area that would otherwise leave you exposed. How to unlock FR 5.56 in Warzone The FR 5.56 is unlocked through the Armory which first requires you to reach Level 25, activate the FR 5.56, and complete three daily challenges. Alternatively, extracting with the burst rifle in Zombies will also unlock it. Best alternative to FR 5.56 in Warzone The most obvious alternative to the FR 5.56 is the DG56, another burst weapon that has a slightly worse TTK than the FR but is more forgiving thanks to its superior fire rate. Warzone has a strong spot for mid- to long-range battles in the meta, so check out others weapons in this mold like the MCW, Kar98k, and BAL-27.

Best FR 5.56 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Setup, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe FR 5.56 or Famas has surged in popularity after a new build for the weapon has been discovered by content creators JGOD and Drift0r. It’s propelled the once-forgotten gun into the meta and is becoming incredibly popular with the Warzone community. Warzone Season 3 is finally on the horizon and fans are excited to see what the developers have got planned. While a number of teasers have revealed the location and time of the upcoming Nuke event, we’re still in the dark about what exactly is going to happen. Despite this, as with every major update, the meta is expected to shift as soon as Season 3 arrives However, it’s not very often that a gun surges in popularity despite receiving no buffs in a recent patch. Well, that’s exactly what’s happened to the FR 5.56 after popular content creator JGOD discovered a semi-automatic setup for the gun that makes it top-tier. How to unlock the FR 5.56 in Warzone Unlocking the FR 5.56 in Warzone is extremely easy and only requires you to reach level 16 in-game. Once unlocked, simply head over to the loadout menu Warzone so you can begin building up the perfect class for the weapon. Now you’ve unlocked the FR 5.56, you’ll need an effective loadout for the gun that can help you dominate your opponents. Luckily, we’ve got the perfect meta set up for you to take into Verdansk and it’s guaranteed to help you pick up more kills. Best FR 5.56 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: FR 24.4″ Sniper – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Ammunition: 50 Rnd Mag – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Perks Perk 1: E.O.D – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: C4 – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Popularized by JGOD, this FR 5.56 or Famas build is centered around using the weapon with the semi-automatic mode on. This allows you to maintain complete control of the weapon and hit every shot at medium-long range. First of all, you’ll want to equip the Monolithic Suppressor to increase the weapon’s overall bullet velocity and remain undetected on the mini-map. While you can often skip using a silenced weapon in standard Call of Duty multiplayer, it’s essential in the battle royale environment. Next, equip the FR 24.4″ Sniper barrel to increase the weapon’s effective damage range and utilize the Commando Foregrip to bolster the gun’s recoil. These attachments allow you to maintain complete control of the FR 5.56 while taking out opponents from range. Finally, you’ll want to use the 50 Rnd Mag to ensure you never run out of bullets and the VLK 3.0x Optic for a clear scope that allows the weapon to thrive at both medium and long range. Keep in mind, it’s important you use this build with semi-auto mode on and tap fire the weapon. The TTK is extremely quick and you’ll be regularly picking enemies off from a distance with this loadout. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best FR 5.56 MW3 Loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionAlthough it is no longer dominant, the FR 5.56 is still a viable weapon in Modern Warfare 3, especially if you use this best loadout designed to make the AR as accurate as possible in MW3 Season 3. The FR 5.56 was once dominant in multiplayer but a series of nerfs have seen it become one of the least popular weapons in the game. This trend has continued into MW3 Season 3, where its usage rate has hit an all-time low. Despite not being popular, the FR 5.56 is still a good weapon that can be laser accurate with the right attachments and setup. Here is the best FR 5.56 loadout in MW3 to make the burst rifle more accurate and consistent at long range. Contents Best FR 5.56 MW3 loadout – Best FR 5.56 MW3 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the FR 5.56 in MW3 – Best FR 5.56 alternative in MW3 – Best FR 5.56 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: JAK BFB – Barrel: 435mm FR435 – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – The JAF BFB was added in Season 1 Reloaded and its arrival was a huge buff for the FR 5.56. This muzzle provides the biggest improvement to recoil control of any attachment in MW3, which is perfect given the FR 5.56 needs just that to be an effective weapon. You can further improve recoil control by equipping the 434mm FR 435 barrel which is preferred over the 600mm FR Longbore as it doesn’t hurt the gun’s handling nearly as much. In saying that, these attachments do still slow down the FR 5.56 a lot which isn’t ideal given how fast-paced multiplayer is. To fix this equip both the SL Razorhawk Laser Light and DR-6 Handstop as these provide massive boosts to key stats like ADS Speed, Movement Speed, and Sprint To Fire Speed. The final attachment should be used on an optic that makes aiming accurately with the FR 5.56 much easier. This is important as burst weapons require precision to be effective. There are several good choices, but the JAK Glassless Optic is the best overall option in MW3 Season 3. Best FR 5.56 MW3 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Gunner Vest Can carry two primary weapons, deploy with max ammo for all weapons, and improves reload speed. – – Gloves: Marksman Gloves Reduced sway and flinch while ADS. – – Gear: High-Gain Antenna Zooms out minimap and makes enemies firing unsilenced weapons remain on it for longer. – – Lethal: Frag Grenade Cookable fragmentation grenade. – – Tactical: EMD Grenade Applies a tracking device to enemies hit, revealing their location on your team’s minimap until removed. – – It’s best to use perks that benefit a slower playstyle as the FR 5.56 is not an effective run-and-gun weapon. The likes of Marksman Gloves and High-Gain Antenna are ideal for this, with the latter being new to Season 3. Equally, the Gunner Vest lets you take another primary weapon to help cover the FR 5.56’s weaknesses, which is best used on a meta SMG like the RAM-9. For equipment, a Frag Grenade is practically never a bad option as it has more potential than any other lethal in MW3. Meanwhile, the EMD Grenade is underrated option that provides additional intel on top of High-Gain Antenna, making it impossible for enemies to escape. How to unlock the FR 5.56 in Modern Warfare 3 The FR 5.56 can be unlocked through the Armory by activating the assault rifle and then either completing 3 daily challenges or winning 3 games. Best FR 5.56 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The DG-56 is another burst assault rifle that differs slightly from the FR 5.56, performing better at close to medium range but not being quite as accurate from afar. Be sure to check out these other MW3 loadouts to stay ahead: Best MW3 guns: Ultimate tier list | Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | SVA 545 loadout | MCW loadout | BP50 loadout

Best FOV settings for Warzone 2 on PlayStation, PC & Xbox ActivisionAn FOV slider is finally available in Warzone 2 as players across console and PC can now set their preferred Field of View in the Call of Duty Battle Royale. From where to find this setting to our recommended FOV, here’s everything you need to know. After years of waiting, Warzone players finally had their prayers answered with the release of Warzone 2. Console players now join the PC crowd in having the ability to customize their FOV. Expanding your scope beyond what was previously capable opens up the world of Warzone, allowing you to see far more than ever before. Enemies trying to flank on the edge of your screen come into focus, helicopters in the sky stay in your line of sight longer than usual, and on the whole, you’ll have a far better understanding of your position on Al Mazrah. So if you’re looking to tweak your FOV in Warzone 2, here’s how it works and what we recommend for each platform. What is Field of View (FOV) in Warzone 2? In essence, FOV is a setting that helps to expand your vision in Warzone 2. With a lower FOV, your sight is limited, effectively giving you tunnel vision. But with a higher FOV, more of the game becomes visible in each moment, allowing you to see a greater amount of detail in moment-to-moment gameplay. How to change your FOV setting in Warzone 2 Thankfully, changing your FOV in Warzone 2 couldn’t be easier. It’s simply a matter of heading to your Graphics settings and finding the FOV slider under the ‘View’ category. Below is a step-by-step breakdown to keep it simple: Press your ‘Options’ input to view the menu. – Head to the Settings tab (signified by a cog). – Scroll down to ‘Graphics’ and select this option. – In Graphics, scroll down to the ‘View’ category. – Select the Field of View (FOV) slider and set your preference. – Best FOV settings for Warzone 2 The ideal Field of View (FOV) setting in Warzone 2 is between 100 and 120. Ultimately, the higher you set the FOV, the more you can see, which is only bound to help in-game. But expanding the FOV too wide can also make it difficult to see smaller targets in the distance. Therefore, hitting the sweet spot between 100 and 120 is the optimal way to go in Warzone 2. Be sure to experiment in a few games until you find what’s right for you.

Best FOV settings for Modern Warfare 3 on PlayStation, PC & Xbox ActivisionWhether you’re playing Modern Warfare 3 on PlayStation, PC, or Xbox, here are the best FOV settings for you to use. Adjusting field-of-view is nothing new for PC community members. However, console Call of Duty (COD) users didn’t get that luxury until Black Ops: Cold War launched in 2020. And, Warzone players on consoles didn’t join in on the fun until 2022. But what advantages does an FOV slider provide? An FOV slider allows players to adjust their field of view to be more zoomed in or out. With a lower FOV, the sight is limited, effectively giving you tunnel vision. But with a higher FOV, more of the game becomes visible in each moment, allowing you to see a greater amount of detail in moment-to-moment gameplay. Tunnel vision sounds bad on paper, but having a narrower perspective comes with advantages of its own. Everything depends on what game mode and the type of gunfights you plan on getting into. So with that in mind, here are the best FOV settings for Modern Warfare 3. How to change your FOV setting in MW3 Thankfully, changing your FOV in Modern Warfare 3 couldn’t be easier. It’s simply a matter of heading to your Graphics settings and finding the FOV slider under the ‘View’ category. Below is a step-by-step breakdown to keep it simple: Press the ‘Options’ input to view the menu. – Head to the Settings tab (signified by a cog). – Scroll down to ‘Graphics’ and select this option. – In Graphics, scroll down to the ‘View’ category. – Select the Field of View (FOV) slider and set your preference. – Best FOV settings for Modern Warfare 3 The ideal Field of View (FOV) setting in MW3 is between 90 and 105. Ultimately, the higher you set the FOV, the more you can see, which can really help in-game. On the other hand, expanding the FOV too wide can also make it difficult to see smaller targets in the distance. Therefore, hitting the sweet spot between 90 and 105 is optimal in Modern Warfare 3. There is no need to crank the setting up to 120 for the average player, as 6v6 maps are much smaller than a battle royale environment. That’s everything you need to know about FOV. For more, check out the rest of our Modern Warfare 3 coverage.

Best FOV settings for Modern Warfare 2 on PlayStation, PC & Xbox ActivisionWith Call of Duty’s FOV setting available on all platforms for Modern Warfare 2, having the right Field of View is more important than ever. Here are the best FOV settings you can have in MWII. Field of View, otherwise known as FOV is a vital feature many players can’t go without. The setting will define the height and width of your view within the game. It can extend or narrow your overall perspective, allowing you to focus on what’s in front of you or see what’s going on to your sides. A well-set FOV can allow you to see other players sneaking up on you and give you the time to react. Whereas a bad FOV will make you unaware of an approaching enemy or give you too much to look for at one time. Here’s the best FOV setting you can have for Modern Warfare 2. What is Field of View in Call of Duty? Field of View is a setting that alters how much of the game you can see on your screen. A lower Field of View will narrow your overall perspective and let you focus more on what’s in front of you. A wider Field of View will allow you to see more around you, letting you keep an eye on any enemies approaching from the side. How to change your FOV in Modern Warfare 2 You’ll be able to change your Field of View in the menu of Modern Warfare 2. Thankfully, finding the setting can be done in a few easy steps: Head into the menu. – Navigate to the cog icon. – Go to Graphics. – Scroll down to ‘Field of View’. – Use the slider to get to your chosen setting. – The best FOV settings for Modern Warfare 2 The ideal Field of View setting for Modern Warfare 2 is between 100 and 120. This will give you the widest Field of View for the least impact on frame rates since increasing it to the maximum can cause a few stutters on lower-powered platforms. When you first load up Modern Warfare 2, the FOV will be at its default of 80. While this isn’t a bad setting to play on, it won’t let you get the most out of the screen or the match in general. If you plan on having your Modern Warfare FOV settings at between 100 and 120, it’s worth remembering that your settings are entirely personal. It’s a good idea to set it at 100 first, then play a few matches with different FOVs until you find the setting that best fits your playstyle. How to play Modern Warfare 2 in 3rd person & adjust FOV | Best FSS Hurricane loadout | Every Modern Warfare 2 map & mode | Best M4 loadout | Best Lachmann MP5 Sub loadout | Modern Warfare 2 post-credits scene and Campaign ending explained | Will Modern Warfare 2 have Zombies? | How long is Call of Duty: Modern Warfare 2 campaign

Best FOV settings for Black Ops Cold War on PC, PlayStation, Xbox ActivisionThe FOV (field of view) setting is one of the most important adjustments you can make in Black Ops Cold War. Find out how you can spot enemies easier and increase your FOV on both PC and console. Being able to adjust your FOV is incredibly advantageous to any FPS player looking to increase their performance. Black Ops Cold War allows both PC and console players to adjust their FOV to whatever they like. The FOV setting will not only dictate how much you can see on the screen, but it will also impact the general feel of the game. As a result, it’s imperative that you get this setting right. Just like controller and mouse sensitivity, your FOV setting is another setting that can greatly impact your performance. After all, having a wider picture of your surroundings is always going to be beneficial when it comes to getting the drop on players. Here’s how you can change your FOV in Black Ops Cold War. What is field of view? To put it simply, field of view is how much of the game you see on your screen. A lower FOV means you’ll see less, while a higher field of view means you’ll see more. While it can be tempting to crank your FOV up to 120, it’s important to note that higher FOV values can actually impair your in-game vision. Your weapon, objects, and enemies will appear smaller and often look further away than they actually are. To combat this, you’ll want to balance your field of view with one that compliments all areas of play. How to change Black Ops Cold War FOV In order to change your FOV in Black Ops Cold War, you’ll first need to load into the game’s lobby screen. Once you’ve done that, follow the instructions below: Click on the Settings button (bottom left of the screen). – Select Graphics from the menu tab. – Scroll down to Display. – Simply adjust the bar to whatever level you want. Black Ops Cold War’s FOV is set to 80 by default, so keep adjusting it from there to see which is best for you. Best FOV settings for Black Ops Cold War While you can get by with the default 80 FOV setting, a lot of pro and casual players swear by playing at around 100 to 120. Of course, this all comes down to personal preference. However, we recommend playing on a FOV of around 105. This greatly increases the amount you can see, while also not dramatically impacting the overall distance of your gun when aiming down sight. If you’re looking to find the best guns to try out in Black Ops Cold War and wish to give them a whirl in custom games, then be sure to check out our Black Ops Cold War weapon guides.

Best FN Scar 17 loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare Activision / Infinity WardThe FN Scar 17 may not be the best AR in Warzone, but with the right attachments, it can unleash some pretty decent damage. With the likes of the overpowered Cold War AK47 and ever-popular C58 loadouts dominating in the game, the FN Scar 17 has struggled to shine in the current weapon meta. Despite its incredibly small clip size and slow rate of fire, this Assault Rifle is still capable of punching above its weight. Whether you’re after another gun to level up or simply want a non-meta rifle that you can rely upon in intense firefights, then be sure to add the FN Scar 17 to your arsenal. In order to help you get the most out of this rifle, these two loadouts will give you a competitive edge over your foes. Contents Best FN Scar 17 class for Warzone Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Forge TAC 20.0” LB – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 30 Round Mags – Warzone’s Verdansk map is a big place and having a gun that only excels in close-quarter battles can quickly leave you high and dry. Fortunately, this class greatly increases the FN Scar 17’s ranged damage, allowing you to capitalize on those medium to long-range firefights. The first attachment on the list is the Monolithic Suppressor. This hefty muzzle drastically increases your effective damage range, while also keeping the gun silent when fired. Being able to shoot without giving away your position is huge, particularly when you wish to remain hidden from prying eyes. Next up is the Forge TAC 20.0” LB and Commando Foregrip. These attachments further supplement the FN Scar 17’s already decent ranged damage, but also assist with aiming stability and lower the rifle’s recoil. Even with these attachments equipped, the FN Scar 17 still has a fair amount of vertical recoil, so simply pull down on your mouse/analog stick when firing for long periods of time. The FN Scar 17’s 20 round magazine may be sufficient in Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer, but this can leave you underequipped when facing multiple armored enemies in Warzone. As a result, it’s often best to equip the 30 Round Mags to avoid any frustrating deaths. Lastly, the Commando Foregrip and VLK 3.0x Optic aids in recoil and aiming stability, whilst boosting your zoom level for those long-distance shots. While these attachments aren’t guaranteed to save you against the lightning-fast MAC-10 and OTs 9 loadouts, it will at least give you a fighting chance. Best FN Scar 17 class for Modern Warfare multiplayer Barrel: FORGE TAC CQC Pro – Stock: FSS Close Quarters Stock – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – Perk: Sleight of Hand – Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer matches play a lot faster than those seen in Warzone, especially since the majority of maps force players into close-quarter combat. As a result, we’ve swapped out the Monolithic Suppressor, Forge TAC 20.0” LB, and 30 Round Mags. While these attachments give the FN Scar 17 increased range damage and bullet velocity, they increase gun’s ADS speed. Both the Forge Tac 20.0″ LB boosts your damage range, bullet velocity, and recoil, but minimizes your ADS speed and movement. Because of this, utilizing FSS Close Quarters Stock improves these things, negating the decreases in these to help you maintain your agility. We recommend keeping the Commando Foregrip and Stippled Grip Tape in pretty much every loadout you create as they feature next to no real drawbacks. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone, then check out our Call of Duty hub for all the latest guides and news. Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Kar98k Warzone loadout | Best Stoner 63 Warzone loadout | Top 20 highest earning players

Best FJX Imperium Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe FJX Imperium is a great new sniper rifle added to Warzone 2 with Season 3 update. It is capable of one-shotting opponents from afar with a top-tier loadout and luckily for you, we’ve got just the thing, here’s our best FJX Imperium meta setup in Warzone 2. Introduced in the Warzone 2 Season 3 update, the FJX Imperium is an “anti-personnel, bolt-action Sniper Rifle [that] intervenes in tense situations with hard-hitting .408 rounds.” FJX Imperium quickly became the premium sniper for insta-killing enemies at the launch of Season 3 alongside the MCPR-300 and the Victus XMR at long-distance. Like many guns in the sniper rifle category, the FJX lacks mobility, but it more than makes up for it in sheer power, allowing you to dominate foes on Al Mazrah and Ashika Island. Here’s the best loadout for the FJX Imperium, including the attachments, Perk Package, and equipment to use. Contents Best FJX Imperium Warzone 2 loadout – Best FJX Imperium Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the FJX Imperium in Warzone 2 – Best FJX Imperium alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best FJX Imperium Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: Tac-Command 19″ – Muzzle: FTAC Reaper – Laser: VLK LZR 7mW – Ammunition: .408 Explosive – Bolt: FJX Blast – For our loadout, we focused on making the FJX capable of one-shooting enemies and increasing its maximum effective range. For starters, equip the Tac-Command 19″ Barrel and the FTAC Reaper muzzle which increases the weapon’s range and bullet velocity. Along the same lines, the .408 Explosive Ammunition is absolutely essential if you want to instantly down your opponents at the cost of some bullet velocity, making the shot drop much faster over distance. To help balance out the horrendous ADS time you will likely achieve with this setup we recommend using the VLK LZR 7MW Laser to improve your ADS time a bit for those medium-range “first to the draw wins” engagements. Lastly, we opted to use the FJX Blast Bolt to give the FJX improved rechambering speed, upping the time between shots so you have a better chance to fire another bullet before you are downed. Best FJX Imperium Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – Having Overkill is essential for any Sniper Rifle loadout. It allows you to equip an SMG or AR to provide a short-range option when not holding a sniping angle. Next, Double Time allows you to use tactical sprint longer, allowing you to reposition in-between shots or to just book it if you are in trouble. On top of that, Fast Hands ensures you’ll be able to quickly switch to your short-range weapon when an enemy catches you off guard. Finally, for the Ultimate Perk, Ghost, makes you undetectable by UAVs and other equipment, which are very popular in the battle royale. We round off the setup with the ol’ faithful Frag Grenade for flushing opponents out of cover and Smoke Grenades for breaking the line of sight and hiding from enemies that hold the advantage over you. How to unlock the FJX Imperium in Warzone 2 The FJX Imperium Sniper Rifle is unlocked by completing Sector C4 of the Season 3 Battle Pass. Luckily, this is one of the free Sectors of the new Black Cell Battle Pass, so can get hold of the gun without purchasing the premium option. Best FJX Imperium alternatives in Warzone 2 We believe that the Victus XMR offers the best damage in the Sniper Rifle class, trumping even the power newcomer FJX Imperium. Equipped with devastating damage as well as being simple to control, this sniper is a must-use gun for any sharpshooters out there, it’s definitely the ultimate meta sniper rifle of the meta right now, but that could very well change in the coming weeks. That’s all for our FJX Imperium loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best FJX Imperium Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe FJX Imperium is a great addition to Modern Warfare 2 that came with the Season 3 update. If you are looking for a top-tier loadout to dominate with it, we’ve got just the thing, here’s our best FJX Imperium meta setup in Modern Warfare 2. Introduced in the Modern Warfare 2 Season 3 update, the FJX Imperium is an extremely powerful Sniper Rifle that makes holding down sightlines a child’s play. FJX Imperium quickly became the most popular sniper rifle in Modern Warfare 2 at the launch of Season 3 with a 3,7% pick rate. Whether that’s a momentary fad or a reliable mainstay is yet to be seen but the weapon certainly is powerful. Here’s the best loadout for the FJX Imperium, including the attachments, Perk Package, and equipment to use. Contents Best FJX Imperium Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best FJX Imperium Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the FJX Imperium in Modern Warfare 2 – Best FJX Imperium alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best FJX Imperium Modern Warfare 2 loadout Attachments Rear Grip: Skull-40 – Laser: VLK LZR 7mW – Barrel: Tac-Command 19″ – Magazine: 7 Round Mag – Bolt: FJX Blast – For our loadout, we focused on making the FJX capable of being used at medium to short ranges, since that is where most of the action happens in MW2. For starters, equip the Skull-40 Rear Grip and VLK LZR 7MW Laser to improve your ADS time and gain some better handling of the weapon. The 7-Round Mag is there to make sure you don’t run dry as often as you normally would in the heat of battle. Lastly, we opted to use the FJX Blast Bolt to give the FJX improved rechambering speed, upping the time between shots so you have a better chance to fire another bullet before you are downed. The Tac-Command 19″ Barrel improves bullet velocity and damage range for maps with longer sightlines. Best FJX Imperium Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Stun Granade – The best Base Perks to choose from when sniping are Tracker and Battle Hardened. Tracker allows you to be aware of nearby enemy movements, and Battle Hardened will keep you safe when the enemy inevitably tries and flush you out. The next Perk to choose is Fast Hands. This will allow you to quickly swap over to your secondary just in case things get a little too close for comfort. As for the ultimate, Ghost is a fantastic all-around Perk that will keep you concealed from a lot of enemy equipment. Lastly, you can’t go wrong with a Proximity Mine and a Stun Granade. One will help you with aggressive pushes and the other will protect you in defensive situations. How to unlock the FJX Imperium in Modern Warfare 2 The FJX Imperium Sniper Rifle is unlocked by completing Sector C4 of the Season 3 Battle Pass. Luckily, this is one of the free Sectors of the new Black Cell Battle Pass, so can get hold of the gun without purchasing the premium option. Best FJX Imperium alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 We believe that the Victus XMR offers the best damage in the Sniper Rifle class, trumping even the power newcomer FJX Imperium. Equipped with devastating damage as well as being simple to control, this sniper is a must-use gun for any sharpshooters out there, it’s definitely the ultimate meta sniper rifle of the meta right now, but that could very well change in the coming weeks. That’s all for our FJX Imperium loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best FJX Horus Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more ActivisionThe FJX Horus is a fantastic weapon that can dominate even the hardest Warzone lobbies when used with a meta loadout, so it’s only natural that so many players have been using it as of late. In Warzone’s current meta, the FJX Horus is one of the strongest submachine guns in the game. Going head-to-head with the Superi 46, it offers a superior TTK but has less damage range. This makes it a particularly strong option in Resurgence, where range isn’t nearly as valuable as in regular battle royale. However, the FJX Horus does have some weaknesses that you’ll need to account for. Most notably, it suffers from quite a lot of horizontal recoil, which can make it difficult to keep on target. As a result, this meta SMG is a weapon best suited to skilled players who can handle its recoil. Even so, its power is undeniable, and anyone wanting to optimize their loadouts should at least try out the FJX Horus. Best FJX Horus Warzone loadout Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: SYN9 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Modus 30 Stock – Magazine: 60 Round Drum – The FJX Horus excels up close regardless of what attachments you put on it, but its recoil can be tricky to deal with, even after the buffs back in Season 4. To make the SMG’s recoil more manageable, use the Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider. Equally, the FJX Horus struggles in the damage range department, but the SYN9 Long Barrel mitigates this by boosting range and bullet velocity by 15%. This also produces a slight improvement in recoil control, which is always a useful stat in Warzone. With any SMG build, you’ll want to maximize mobility where possible, and the FJX Horus is no exception. To do so, the Modus 30 Stock is a great choice, as it improves sprint speed, tactical sprint speed, and other key mobility stats. The best part is that this attachment’s only con is extra flinch resistance, which is a negligible stat on an SMG. The 60 Round Drum is a must on any FJX Horus loadout, literally doubling its magazine size and making the SMG much more suited to big team modes like Trios and Quads. Finally, a meta optic like the JAK Glassless Optic is highly recommended, as the FJX Horus’ iron sights can block your vision in key moments, while a clear reticle like this has no such problem. Best FJX Horus class: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Mountaineer – Fall from higher heights without taking fatal damage. – Perk 2: Double Time – Increases Tac Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – Perk 3: Resupply – Recharged equipment over 50 seconds. – Perk 4: Resolute – speed boost when you are hit with an enemy shot – Lethal: Sticky Grenade – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – SMGs like the FJX Horus are all about fast-paced gameplay and rushing other teams. If this is your goal, then a combination of Mountaineer and Double Time is perfect, with these perks enhancing movement in a variety of ways. For Perk 3, the Resupply perk benefits an aggressive playstyle by constantly resupplying your equipment, giving you more tools to win team fights. To best take advantage of this, use a Semtex and Smoke Grenade, as these give a nice balance of damage and utility. Finally, the Resolute perk is a fantastic way to keep yourself mobile on the battlefield. When being hit, the speed boost this Perk gives you can help you get out of most situations. It’s a great option to keep yourself alive in situations where you may have otherwise been downed. How to unlock the FJX Horus The FJX Horus can be unlocked by activating it in the Armory and completing 5 daily challenges. Previously, it was unlocked by completing Sector 8 of the Season 3 Battle Pass, but this option was removed once the season concluded. Best FJX Horus alternative in Warzone The HRM-9 is still a dominant SMG in Warzone and one of the strongest alternatives to the FJX Horus. It is a fantastic close-range weapon that has a top-tier TTK, even after it was nerfed multiple times. That’s all for the best FJX Horus loadout in Warzone. For more Warzone class guides, check out the current meta weapons, best assault rifles, sniper rifles, and SMGs.

Best FJX Horus MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoThe FJX Horus is a strong weapon added back in Season 3 that continues to dominate multiplayer to this day, so here’s the best FJX Horus loadout to turn this MW3 SMG into a dominant all-around primary. SMGs have always played a crucial part in multiplayer, with them being the best option for close-range gunfights in most cases. Modern Warfare 3 is no different with the likes of the Superi 46 being amongst the best weapons in MW3. The FJX Horus continues that legacy by offering yet another strong SMG that deals incredible damage up close. Even better, the introduction of the JAK Scimitar Kit has made the FJX Horus even stronger, transforming it into a top-tier AR-SMG hybrid. To get the most out of the FJX Horus, you’ll want to use this recommended loadout which maximizes the SMG’s performance in as many situations as possible. Best FJX Horus MW3 loadout Here’s the best loadout to make the FJX Horus as versatile as possible, while retaining its excellent mobility and handling: Conversion Kit: JAK Scimitar Kit – Muzzle: Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Modus 30 Stock – Underbarrel: FTAC SP-10 Angled Grip – The FJX Horus is already strong on its own, but the JAK Scimitar Kit makes it even better. This powerful Aftermarket Part turns the FJX Horus into an AR-SMG hybrid that is still strong up close, but also performs much better at both medium and long range. To make the FJX Horus as versatile as possible, use both the Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider and FTAC SP-10 Angled Grip. When combined, these improve recoil control by around 20%, which makes the MW3 SMG much more consistent when trying to stretch out its effective range. You don’t want to overfocus on recoil control though, as the FJX Horus is still an SMG, so mobility and handling are equally important. To take advantage of this strength, use the Modus 30 Stock to boost ADS Speed by 7% and Sprint Speed by 4%. This is an incredibly powerful attachment that provides huge benefits while having zero notable cons. Last but not least, a meta sight like the JAK Glassless Optic is a great option to make landing shots easier. Once again, this is especially useful when attempting to take down enemies from far away, which is something that FJX Horus is perfectly capable of with the JAK Scimitar Kit equipped. Best FJX Horus MW3 class: Perks and equipment Vest: Ninja Vest – Eliminate footstep sounds, immune to movement reduction effects, bonus Throwing Star/Knife ammo, resupply Throwing Stas/Knives every 25 seconds. – Boots: Stalker Boots – Increased strafe and ADS movement speed. – Gear: Data Jacker – Enemies you kill drop a smartphone. Collecting the smartphone generates a radar ping from that location. – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Since you’ll be constantly running around with the FJX Horus, it makes sense to use the Ninja Vest. This powerful vest perk silences your footsteps and resupplies Throwing Knives, making you both silent and deadly. Speaking of equipment, you’ll also want to use a Stun Grenade to immobilize enemies and rake in easy kills. The Ninja Vest already provides the benefits of Covert Sneakers, so the boots slot is instead best used on the Stalker Boots. These increase strafe and ADS movement speed, letting you move around and push enemies easier, taking advantage of the FJX Horus’ excellent mobility. As for the lone gear slot, the Data Jacker perk is a fantastic option with a mobile SMG like this. When activated, it causes players you kill to drop a smartphone, which can then be collected for a free radar ping, exposing the locations of other nearby enemies. How to unlock the FJX Horus in MW3 To get the FJX Horus in Modern Warfare 3, you’ll need to activate it in the Armory and then complete either 5 Daily Challenges or win 5 matches in multiplayer. Previously, it was earned by completing Sector 8 of the Season 3 Battle Pass, but this option was removed once Season 4 started. Best FJX Horus alternative in MW3 The RAM-9 is another excellent SMG that has proven itself to be a top contender in the current meta. Its incredible sprint-to-fire time and overall excellent handling make it perfect for playing fast and aggressively pushing enemy players. For more top-tier SMG loadouts to use in MW3, check out these meta builds for the WSP-9, WSP Swarm, Rival-9, Striker, and Striker 9.

Best FiNN loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare Activision / Infinity WardThe mid-season update has hit both Modern Warfare and Warzone, introducing a wave of new content for players to get their hands on. The FiNN LMG is the latest gun to be added to the game and comes with a powerful punch. Here, we break down two of the strongest FiNN loadouts you should be using. While the ever-popular Bruen LMG took a double hit in Activision’s August update, many players have been looking for the next best replacement. Fortunately, it looks like the newly released FiNN LMG will do just that. This high-damage gun has incredible precision, ludicrous fire rate, and easily controllable recoil. Judging from early gameplay, it seems that the FiNN shares a lot of similarities to that of its post-patch predecessor. In fact, we wouldn’t be surprised if this LMG receives a nerf at some point. However, those of you who miss the hyper-aggressive playstyle of the Bruen will definitely want to add this LMG to your arsenal. Unlocking Modern Warfare’s latest weapon is also incredibly easy, so you should be able to complete the challenges in no time. In order to help you get the most out of the FiNN, we’ve put together two loadouts that you can use to dominate your enemies in Warzone and Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer. Best FiNN loadout for Warzone Monolithic Suppressor – XRK Longshot – Tac Laser – VLK 3.0x Optic – Commando Foregrip – This loadout absolutely shreds across close to medium engagement ranges, making it incredibly deadly during those late-game firefights. Even better, we’ve also kitted the FiNN out with a few attachments to help minimize its vertical recoil, so you’ll be able to beam squads at range if you have a steady aim. First up is the Monolithic Suppressor and XRK Longshot. The muzzle not only drastically increases your effective damage range, it also keeps you hidden from the minimap. Meanwhile, the XRK bolsters the FiNN’s rate of fire, speeds up its bullet velocity, and even adds to the LMG’s range. These two attachments push the FiNN to its very limits, but you’ll need to pull down on your mouse/analog stick if you wish to mitigate its vertical recoil completely. While the Commando Foregrip does help to ease the FiNN’s vertical kick, it can still be a little unruly if left unchecked. Attaching a Tac Laser will also increase accuracy and reduce the time penalty of aiming down sights, giving you the quick response time you need to be competitive in close-quarters fights. The Tac Laser also effectively eliminates the ADS penalty of most optics, allowing you to use the VLK 3.0x sight. This optic is incredibly popular due to its clean central red dot and is one of the only magnified sights that doesn’t clutter your field of view. Being able to clearly see your targets at range is also a massive benefit, especially when you’re scouring the map for the next kill. Best FiNN loadout for Modern Warfare XRK Longshot – Tac Laser – G.I. Mini Reflex – Commando Foregrip – Sleight of Hand – Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer maps largely favor close-quarter firefights, so this loadout is all about enhancing the FiNN’s ADS speed. As a result, we’ve removed Monolithic suppressor and switched out the VLK Optic for the G.I. Mini Reflex. These attachments may work wonders on the game’s medium-range maps, but they are extremely situational and offer very little positives outside of Warzone. The FiNN’s standard sights aren’t unusable, but we found that G.I. Mini Reflex gave us the added accuracy needed to snag those quick cranium kills. Meanwhile, both the XRK Longshot, Tac Laser, and Commando Foregrip have been kept due to their speed-enhancing attributes. These three attachments should be the bread and butter of any FiNN loadout, so try to build around them when experimenting with any new combinations. Rounding things off the bottom of the list is the Sleight of Hand Perk. Not only will this perk greatly cut down any lengthy reload times, it will also help you avoid frustrating mid-reload deaths. After all, there’s nothing worse than getting caught in a situation where you can’t fight back. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, check out our full list of best loadouts for every gun.

Best Warzone FFAR class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / TreyarchThe FFAR 1 was originally one of the best close-quarter weapons in Warzone, but how does it stack up in Season 2 Reloaded? Find out which attachments you should be using in order to increase your win rate. Warzone Season 2 Reloaded brought with it plenty of new content and a number of weapon balance changes to the game. Despite previous nerfs targeting the FFAR’s max damage, range, and neck multiplier, it can still deal a decent amount of damage when kitted out correctly. While this lightning-fast AR may not be as strong as it once was, this updated FFAR 1 loadout will still give you the edge needed to secure a number of kills in the popular battle royale. Whether you’re looking to get that all-important win on Rebirth Island or just want a viable close-quarters companion, you can’t go wrong with this FFAR loadout. Contents Best Warzone FFAR loadout – Best FFAR Setup (perks & equipment) – How to unlock the FFAR in Warzone – Alternative FFAR loadout – Best Warzone FFAR loadout Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 21.2″ Ranger – Stock: Raider Stock – Ammunition: Salvo 50 Rnd Fast Mag – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – While the FFAR may have taken a significant hit in past balancing updates, this loadout helps to alleviate some of the gun’s current issues and enables you to pick up plenty of kills. In fact, the current meta setup perfectly demonstrates just how lethal the FFAR can be. The ever-popular Agency Suppressor is still there, ensuring you stay off the map while increasing bullet velocity and damage range. Meanwhile, the 21.2″ Ranger Barrel goes further to improve bullet velocity – vital if you wish to have a fighting chance against the current close-quarters MP40 and Owen Gun meta. Both the Raider Stock and Salvo 50 Rnd Fast Mag also remain untouched. After all, the added mobility and extra ammunition will always be beneficial, particularly when you’re going for those clutch squad wipes. Rounding things off at the bottom of the list is the Field Agent Grip. The FFAR’s biggest downfall is its recoil, massively inhibiting its ability to perform at range. The Field Agent Grip improves both horizontal and vertical recoil, giving you much greater precision. Even so, it’s important to bear in mind that the FFAR is best at close to medium ranges. Best FFAR setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Kar98k – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like most meta AR Warzone loadouts, our FFAR class utilizes EOD and Amped. Not only do these perks keep you safe from any explosives, but they also enable you to quickly swap weapons – an area that is incredibly important when snagging those clutch kills. Overkill enables the use of the Kar98k which remains one of the best weapons in Warzone Season 2 Reloaded. While Overkill keeps you competitive in close-quarter firefights, it also gives you tremendous amounts of coverage in mid to long-range firefights. Here, the FFAR will be your weapon for close to medium ranges, while the Marksman Rifle will ensure you can lay down accurate fire on far-off enemies. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help with flushing out pesky campers. If you find an enemy squad hiding in a nearby building, simply toss in your Semtex and let the bullets fly. How to unlock the FFAR in Warzone Unlocking the FFAR 1 in Warzone is incredibly simple and only requires you to reach level 40 in either Black Ops Cold War or Warzone. As the games have a synced progression system, this makes it relatively easy to unlock this high-damage gun. Of course, now you’ve got the weapon, you’ll need an effective loadout to push it to its limits. Alternative to this FFAR loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the FFAR, check out our Cooper Carbine loadout guide. This devastating AR has proven to be a devastating pick thanks to its high damage, excellent precision, and lightning-fast fire rate. Especially at close ranges. Read More: Best Warzone Assault Rifle class loadouts – Similar to the FFAR, this Cooper Carbine loadout prioritizes close-range effectiveness. Make sure you give this gun a go if you wish to secure plenty of kills across Caldera and Rebirth! Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts? Check out our list of guides below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Top 20 highest earning players | Welgun | MP40 || PPSh-41 | AK-47 | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Highest-earning Warzone players | Armaguerra 43 | Swiss K31 | Best STG44

Best FFAR 1 loadout for Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War TreyarchThe final Assault Rifle you unlock in Black Ops Cold War is one of the strongest in the game. Here’s the best loadout to get the most out of the FFAR 1. Black Ops Cold War launched with five Assault Rifles for you to pick from. Some boast incredible damage while others will give you a more precise shot from a longer distance. While most try to strike a good balance overall, the FFAR 1 hones in on fire rate. It comes in with a whopping 909 RPM. That’s almost 200 rounds quicker than the second fastest AR in the game, the XM4 at 722 RPM. Therefore, you’ll be shredding enemies in the blink of an eye. Accuracy is the tradeoff here, however. With such a fast rate of fire, you’ll need the right attachments to control your recoil. Moreover, you’ll be running out of ammo faster than any other AR. Fear not though, we’ve got you sorted with an ideal loadout to get the most out of the FFAR 1. Best FFAR 1 loadout for Black Ops Cold War Attachments Optic: Microflex LED – Muzzle: SOCOM Eliminator – Barrel: 19.5 Reinforced Heavy – Body: Steady Aim Laser – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: 34 Rnd – Handle: Airborne Elastic Wrap – Stock: Raider Stock – Perks Flak Jacket – Scavenger – Ninja – Equipment Lethal: Stimshot – Tactical: Semtex – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – As with most optimal loadouts, running with the Gunfighter Wildcard is essential. Eight attachments will bring a new level of power to your weapon compared to the standard five. Starting out, you can’t go wrong with your own pick from three Barrels. The 20.3 Takedown, 21.2 Ranger, and 19.5 Reinforced Heavy, all come with a solid mix of range and velocity. Arguably the two most important stats for ARs, we recommend the Reinforced Heavy simply to get the best of both worlds, rather than leaning too heavily for one or the other. For the Body, sticking with earlier unlocks is key. While the later attachments provide bigger bonuses, the tradeoffs simply aren’t worthwhile. The base Steady Aim Laser will give a decent buff to hip-fire accuracy without ruining your ADS speed or sprint to fire time. Similar can be said for the Magazine. The FFAR 1 already has a relatively slow ADS time, so you don’t want to be hindering yourself even further. Sticking with the 34 RND Mag will give you a nice boost to each magazine while keeping your 1v1 reaction times intact. With these attachments all good to go, your FFAR 1 will be in top form. The base weapon itself can absolutely fry enemies at close to mid-ranges, but this loadout will give you more control than ever. Read More: Best Bullfrog loadout in Black Ops Cold War – If you’ve maxed out the FFAR 1 and you’re looking for your next challenge, be sure to brush up on our other Black Ops Cold War loadout guides.

Best Fennec Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / Infinity WardCall of Duty‘s Fennec may not be the go-to SMG in Warzone, but it can still pump out some serious damage. Here is the best Fennec loadout you should be using to get a competitive edge in Warzone Pacific Season 1. The Fennec, a recreation of the Vector from previous CoD games, has been a popular SMG ever since it first graced our screens back in Modern Warfare 2. Packed with a buttery smooth recoil pattern, excellent hip-fire, great mobility, and an insanely fast rate of fire, the Fennec is a beast of a gun. In fact, it’s so lethal that it can tear through multiple enemies in just a blink of an eye. The Warzone meta has changed a lot in light of recent updates, and the Fennec luckily received a buff to its bullet velocity in Season 5. If you enjoy gliding across Verdansk with an SMG, the Fennec could be a great off-meta option to strike down your opponents with speed and precision. Contents How to unlock the Fennec in Warzone In order to unlock the Fennec in Warzone, you must get 5 kills while using an SMG with the Solozero Optics Mini Reflex and Ranger Foregrip in 10 different matches. Due to this challenge requiring SMG kills, we recommend loading up a game of Plunder. Read More: 10 most popular weapons in Warzone – Once you’ve loaded into the match, simply hot drop onto players and begin taking them down with your SMG. As soon as you have claimed the 5 kills, quit out of the match and rinse and repeat until you have completed the challenge. Best Fennec loadout in Warzone Attachments Barrel: ZLR18” Deadfall – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – Laser: Tac Laser – Ammunition: 40 Round Drum Mags – While Warzone’s Verdansk ’84 map may favor long- to medium-range engagements, you’ll still want to equip a weapon that can give you the edge in those close-quarter firefights. This loadout increases the Fennec’s recoil control, while also giving it a little extra range for when you need that added coverage. First up is the ZLR18” Deadfall. This attachment not only bolsters your effective damage range, but it also increases your recoil control and bullet velocity, helping with the precision the Fennec needs when going for those all-important shots. While this attachment does increase your ADS speed, we think this loss is worth it, especially when you consider how woeful the Fennec’s mid-range damage is. If you desire even more mobility, you can sacrifice the Stippled Grip Tape and run a Fennec loadout more similar to Aydan’s. Either way, you should be able to find success with any of these loadouts! The next two attachments are the Merc Foregrip and Stippled Grip Tape, along with the Tac Laser. Not only will these additions keep the Fennec stable while aiming and hip firing, but they will also increase the ADS & sprint to fire speed, improving your reload speed, giving you even greater control when you need to react quickly. Read More: Best Warzone Bullfrog class loadout – Taking down fully armored players in Warzone can often prove frustrating, but the 40 Round Drum Mags will give you more than enough bullets to shred through many an armored enemy. This attachment is a must for those that want to secure those game-winning squad wipes. Be warned, though, as the fire rate is incredibly fast. If you’re playing Trios or Quads, this could be a risky gun to use. Best Fennec setup (Perks & equipment) Perks Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Secondary: MG82 – This Fennec loadout uses EOD to stave off any explosive damage, while Amped enables you quickly swap to your MG82 in mid to long-range gunfights. These perks are found on almost all of our meta loadouts, especially since they increase your overall survivability. Read More: Best MAC-10 Warzone class loadout – The Overkill perk enables the use of another primary weapon, making it a great choice if you wish to utilize Warzone’s best Assault rifles (or LMGs). Lastly, both the Throwing Knife and Heartbeat Sensor give you the tools needed to hunt enemy players and finish downs without wasting bullets. Best Fennec loadout Warzone tips The Fennec may not be the most popular SMG in Warzone, but it is known for its fast fire rate and TTK at close ranges. As a result, this loadout aims to accentuate this weapon’s already existing strengths. If you want to take full of advantage of this Fennec loadout, then these tips should be helpful: As previously stated, this SMG shines in close-ranged gunfights. As a result, you’ll want to pair it with a sniper rifle or an assault rifle to cover all bases. We recommend using the Swiss K3 as your sniper pick, or the STG44 if you decide to choose an assault rifle. – Due to the Fennec’s fast fire rate, you can often burn through your magazine without recognizing. Try your best to conserve ammo by only engaging in gunfights that are within the Fennec’s optimal range. – The Heartbeat Sensor tactical is great for locating enemies that are in close proximity. If you suspect an enemy is nearby, use this equipment to pinpoint their exact location and let the Fennec do the rest. – Alternative to the Fennec loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the Fennec, then check out our best PPsh-41 loadout Warzone guide. While this may not be the most popular gun in Warzone, its fire rate and fast movement times resemble that of the Fennec. Read More: Best Bullfrog Warzone class loadout – If you are an aggressive player that prefers taking on enemies up close, then the PPsh-41 is an SMG you should definitely try out. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, make sure to check out our full list of best Warzone loadouts in Warzone Pacific Season 1. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts? Check out our list of guides below: Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | M4A1 | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR

Best Fennec 45 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonWarzone 2’s Fennec 45 continues its downfall as its popularity reaches an all-time low. However, it is still quite a good SMG that can help you dominate games. Here’s our pick for the best Fennec 45 loadout in Warzone 2, including the best attachments, perks, and equipment. Based on the real-world KRISS Vector, the Fennec 45 is a rapid-fire submachine gun that once stood alone as the best SMG in Warzone 2. Nerfs to the Fennec in Season 2 would see its popularity decrease with competitors taking its crown. However, Season 4 has seen it receive a buff decreasing its bullets to kill by one. That may not seem like much but given how fast its TTK was already even a small improvement can create a truly dominant gun. After the buff, the Fennec 45 has once again become a top-tier option. To get the most out of the Fennec 45 in Warzone 2 you’ll need a top-tier loadout, and thankfully we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Fennec 45 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Fennec 45 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Fennec 45 in Warzone 2 – Best Fennec 45 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Fennec 45 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Bruen Pendulum – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Agile Assault-7 Stock – Magazine: Fennec Mag 45 – Rear Grip: Fennec Stippled Grip – For starters, you’ll want to equip the Bruen Pendelum Muzzle and the Fennec Stippled Grip Rear Grip. These two attachments significantly decrease the magnitude of the SMG’s vertical recoil which is the hardest part to control. It also slightly reduces horizontal bounce making the Fennec more predictable. The Fennec is not gifted with great iron sights and they can be awkward to use at times. Some players may be able to put up with it but we still recommend using an effective close-range optic like the Cronen Mini Pro to make sure you don’t miss your shots. The Agile Assault-7 Stock provides a huge boost in mobility keeping the Fennec 45 feeling snappy even after equipping other heavy attachments. The improved Sprint Speed it gives is especially useful as you’ll be spending plenty of time running around crossing Warzone 2’s large maps. Finally, round off the loadout with the Fennec Mag 45 so you never run out of bullets during a skirmish and can take out multiple opponents before having to reload. This is a must given that Fennec’s rapid fire rate can empty even a larger magazine in no time at all. Best Fennec 45 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – To kick off, it gives you access to Double Time which doubles the duration of Tactical Sprint which is excellent when wielding an SMG. At medium range, the Fennec is often dominated by ARs, but at close quarters, the gun is unrivaled so having access to extra mobility to reposition is extremely useful. There’s nothing worse than dying to a claymore or grenade in Warzone 2, and fortunately, Bomb Squad prevents this from happening. It’s a must-use Perk for aggressive players who don’t want to get punished pushing buildings and flanking behind enemy teams. As for your bonus perk, you’ll have access to Resupply adding an extra lethal and tactical, plus it recharges your equipment over time. This is incredible for providing your team utility and making sure you have the tools to perform the best possible at all times. Finally, High Alert is a top-tier Ultimate Perk with the Fennec as it is with just about every other gun. When triggered it notifies you of any foes in the area looking your way giving you an opportunity to escape dangerous situations. How to unlock the Fennec 45 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the Fennec 45 in Warzone 2, you need to reach Level 38. This can be done by either playing Warzone 2, DMZ, or multiplayer as all three modes provide experience. Although it won’t unlock the weapon, having access to a custom blueprint earned through the Battle Pass or purchased from the store will also grant access to the Fennec 45. Best Fennec 45 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the Fennec 45’s fire rate is causing you to miss too many shots and you’re looking for a more classic SMG experience, then the Lachmann Sub is a wonderful option thanks to its highly competitive TTK. Alternatively, the new ISO 45 performs similarly to the Fennec 45 but has some unique characteristics that may better suit your playstyle. That’s all for our Fennec 45 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work

Best Fennec 45 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisonThe Fennec 45 remains a popular pick from the SMG category in Modern Warfare 2 despite its nerfs and all of the new weapons added to the game over the seasons, it has an extremely fast fire rate, and low TTK if you have the correct attachments and a meta loadout. Season 4 of Modern Warfare 2 has begun, and the Fennec did not receive changes in this patch, so you can still count on it to do its job properly. With a huge arsenal of guns available to choose from in the category, it can be difficult to pick out a winner from the bunch. Well, one SMG that certainly stands out from the crowd is the Fennec 45 with its blisteringly fast-rate and lethal TTK at close quarters. With a strong setup, the weapon can delete foes and offer an impressive amount of mobility. Luckily, we’ve got you covered with a meta loadout that’ll help you take over your matches. Best Fennec 45 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Fennec 45 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the Fennec 45 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the Fennec 45 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Fennec 45 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Attachments Laser: VLK LZR 7mW – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Rear Grip: Fennec Stippled Grip – Underbarrel: Phase-3 Grip – Stock: Agile Assault-7 Stock – For starters, you’ll want to equip the VLK LZR 7mW for increased accuracy. While you won’t be laser-beaming anyone at long-range with the Fennec, its low mag size makes it essential for you to land every single bullet at close quarters to maximize its TTK. After that, make sure you utilize the Agile Assault-7 Stock, Fennec Stippled Grip, and Phase-3 Grip as these significantly enhance your mobility as well as add a little more stability to the loadout. All of these choices combine to offer a huge amount of speed while using the Fennec, on top of a quick ADS time so you can lock onto your enemies in an instant. Finally, round off the class with the Cronen Mini Pro, an optic that will make it easy to land all your shots on target at close range. Best Fennec 45 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Flash Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Kick off your perk choices with Double Time as it will allow you to outmaneuver your opponents with ease, giving you the speed to clear out rooms and corridors in seconds. After that, you’ll want to utilize Battle Harderend as a lot of enemies will attempt to thwart your pushes with stuns and flashes. This perk reduces the effects of lethal grenades, making it extremely difficult for foes to lock you down. When it comes to your bonus perk, Fast Hands is a strong option as you want to be able to switch to your secondary quickly just in case your Fennec runs out of ammo. For your Ultimate, we recommend High Alert as it ensures you’ll never be caught off-guard by pesky opponents. This will make it extremely difficult for enemies to lock you down and force opponents to take fights on your terms. As for equipment, we recommend a Flash Grenade to aid you in your 1v1s and aggressive pushes, as well as a Stim for a boost of health when you need it most. How to unlock the Fennec 45 in Modern Warfare 2 In order to unlock the Fennec 45 in Modern Warfare 2, you’ll need to reach level 38, which shouldn’t take you long at all if you’re grinding out multiplayer matches. Alternative to the Fennec 45 Modern Warfare 2 loadout If the Fennec 45’s low mag size and ultra-aggressive playstyle doesn’t suit you, it may be time to test out the Lachmann MP5 Sub. This classic and versatile SMG thrives at close range with a mixture of mobility and high damage output. While its fire rate may not match the Fennec, it’s a more balanced weapon that can compete at medium range if needed. With a top-tier setup, the Lachmann MP5 Sub can be a devastating weapon, and luckily, we’ve got all the details you need right here. Now that you have the best Fennec 45 loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: All Modern Warfare 2 beta maps and game modes | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in the Modern Warfare 2 Beta | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best FARA 83 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Setup, Perks Activision / TreyarchThe best FARA 83 build is still a staple pick in the Warzone AR meta, so make sure you use this loadout to maximize your damage and accuracy in Season 6. The Warzone Season 6 update brought a host of weapon balance changes to the game, which has led to the FARA climbing up the current AR rankings. Just like the AMAX, the FARA is based on the real-life Galil, and boy does it pack a powerful punch. Boasting an incredibly high rate of fire, high damage profile, and incredible precision, the FARA enables players to kill their foes in a matter of seconds. As a result, this deadly Assault Rifle is a must-pick for those that want to rack up high kill count games. In order to help you get the most out of the FARA, we’ve put together a lethal loadout that you can use to gain a competitive edge in the game’s Season 6 update. Contents Best FARA 83 Warzone loadout – Best FARA 83 setup – How to unlock the FARA 83 in Warzone – Alternative FARA 83 loadout – Best FARA 83 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Gru Suppressor – Barrel: 18.7″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: Spetsnaz 60 Rnd – First up is the Gru Suppressor and 18.7″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel. The Gru Suppressor diminishes the FARA’s vertical recoil control and conceals muzzle flash, which enables you to effortlessly beam your foes across all ranges without having to wrestle for control. Read More: Best Warzone weapons – Meanwhile, the 18.7″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel increases the FARA’s bullet velocity and provides a boost to the gun’s damage range. This barrel in particular is useful as it outweighs the nerfs to the FARA’s damage, while also bolstering your strafe speed. The Axial Arms 3x Optic is a must for those that wish to remain accurate across vast engagement ranges. Of course, the Visiontech 2x could also be used here should you prefer to opt for more aggressive engagements. Meanwhile, the Spetsnaz Grip has been utilized to reduce the FARA’s horizontal recoil and increase sprinting movement speed. Simply click on your target’s body/head and get beaming away to claim a quick kill. Lastly, the Spetsnaz 60 Rnd Mag supplies players with more than enough bullets to shred through even the most well-armored foes. The FARA’s fire rate is incredibly fast, so you’ll chew through these rounds quickly. Fortunately, the overall reload speed isn’t that lengthy. Best FARA 83 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MAC-10 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like most meta Warzone loadouts in Season 6, our FARA class utilizes both EOD and Amped. EOD greatly decreases the effectiveness of enemy explosives, while Amped enables you to quickly swap to your secondary weapon. Read More: Top 20 highest earning Warzone players – Meanwhile, the Overkill perk allows you to use either of our MAC-10 or PPSh loadouts, which will keep you competitive in close-quarter engagements. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down nearby enemies and flush out pesky campers. Simply locate your target, throw in a Semtex, and rush in with your PPSh to claim another kill for your prize. How to unlock the FARA 83 in Warzone The FARA 83 is unlocked by getting 2 headshot kills in 15 different matches while using Assault Rifles. This can be done with any Assault Rifle in the game, so be sure to use your most accurate loadout to get through the challenge as efficiently as possible. How to play with the best FARA 83 loadout in Warzone As with most AR’s in Warzone, this FARA 83 loadout gives you the best of both worlds. While it’s devastating in longer-range fights, its fast fire rate can also help you in a pinch when battling up close. With this specific setup, you’ll be wanting to play patiently more often than not. Sitting on rooftops will let you spot foes from a distance and quickly beam them down. Thanks to the attachments, the recoil will even have you contending with snipers. That’s not to say you can’t push the pace as well. With such a powerful AR, enemies up close won’t stand much of a chance if your aim is sharp. Use your Tactical equipment to get a better read on nearby teams and wipe them out without much of a hassle. Alternative FARA loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the FARA, check out our Krig 6 loadout. This devastating AR continues to sit comfortably at the top of the AR rankings, thanks to its high damage and excellent precision. Read More: 10 most popular weapons in Warzone – Unlike the FARA, the Krig 6 has very minimal recoil and is incredibly easy to control. This means you can effortlessly gun for long-range kills, while also having the added damage in close-quarter firefights. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts? Check out our list of guides below: Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | M4A1 | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR

Best FARA 83 Black Ops Cold War loadout class: Attachments, setup, perks ActivisionThe new FARA 83 assault rifle has arrived in Black Ops Cold War as a Season 2 Battle Pass reward, and here’s how you can get the most of the deadly new weapon. Each new Battle Pass brings two new weapons, as well as a number of blueprints, to Black Ops Cold War and Warzone — and these can often be meta-defining. For example, in Season 1, we got the Mac 10 which has become the go-to SMG in Warzone and can certainly hold its own in regular multiplayer modes, with decent handling and a high rate of fire. Now, the FARA 83 — better known as the Galil to Call of Duty veterans — is in the Battle Pass, and once you’ve unlocked it you’re going to want to find the best way to decimate your enemies with it. Best FARA 83 class in Cold War The FARA is unlocked at Battle Pass Level 15, and is somewhat comparable to the popular FFAR in how it’s used. Read More: Best FARA 83 Warzone loadout class – The weapon has a very fast time-to-kill (TTK) but this is counteracted by a pretty hefty level of recoil, so this loadout minimizes that, but should mainly be used for close to medium-range fights. FARA 83 attachments This build was put together with the Gunfighter wildcard, allowing you to use every attachment slot available. Muzzle: Muzzle Brake 5.56 – Barrel: 13.7” Takedown – Laser: Steady Aim Laser – Optic: Microflex LED – Stock: KGB Pad – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Ammunition: 45 Rnd – Rear Grip: SASR Jungle Grip – Of course, if you prefer not to use Gunfighter and instead opt for another wildcard, you’ll have to remove some of these attachments. In that case, we would recommend getting rid of the Laser, Optic and Stock attachments, which will slightly reduce accuracy and movement speed but allow you to still make the most of the FARA’s strengths. Best FARA 83 Cold War perks The chances are that while using the FARA, you’ll be moving a lot and trying to avoid long-range gunfights. For that reason, you’ll want to pick up the following perks: Perk 1: Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Tracker – Perk 3: Ninja – With these perks, you’ll be able to stay stealthy while running and gunning with the FARA, and the Tactical Mask will help drastically when enemies are trying to slow down your pushes with flash or stun grenades. That said, this gun will definitely take some getting used to, but if you hit your shots you’re on to a guaranteed winner.

Best FAL loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare Activision / Infinity WardThe FAL received a fairly decent buff in the latest Modern Warfare patch, but you’ll need to kit it out with the best attachments if you truly wish to make the most of its one-hit kill potential. Here, we break down two of the strongest FAL loadouts that you should be using in both Warzone and Modern Warfare. Now that the Grau and MP5 have taken a significant hit to both their damage range, a lot of players have been searching for a worthy successor. Of course, only time will tell whether the FAL has what it takes to claim the top-tier crown. However, the new one-shot potential this semi-automatic rifle has could give it the break it needs to finally shine in Modern Warfare’s wider meta. Whether you’re after a highly accurate rifle that can dish out decent damage or just wish to experiment with Infinity Ward’s latest FAL buff, then you’ll want to add these loadouts to your arsenal. Best FAL loadout for Warzone Monolithic Suppressor – XRK Marksman – G.I. Mini Reflex – Commando Foregrip – 30 Round Mags – The FAL already had decent range thanks to its semi-automatic fire rate, but these attachments boost this rifle’s long-distance kill potential even further. First up is the Monolithic Suppressor and XRK Marksman barrel. Not only do these attachments enhance your range damage, they also reduce recoil and increase bullet velocity. These two attachments are arguably the most important features in this loadout as you’ll want to try to capitalize on that all-important one-hit headshot buff. Aiming for those cranium kills isn’t always easy though, so we’ve equipped the G.I. Mini Reflex sight to avoid any frustration that come with using the FAL’s unwieldy iron sights. The Commando Foregrip will also help keep the FAL accurate during prolonged firing, while the 30 Round Mags enable you to shred through multiple armored units without the need to constantly reload – after all, there’s nothing worse than getting caught a little short in end-game firefights. Best FAL loadout for Modern Warfare multiplayer XRK Marksman – Tac Laser – G.I. Mini Reflex – Commando Foregrip – 24 Round Mags – We’ve stripped away both the Monolithic Suppressor and 30 Round Mags to help reduce the time it takes to ADS. While the extra range damage and bullet velocity may be useful in Warzone’s gigantic Verdansk map, these enhancements really aren’t needed in Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer, particularly when so many maps are geared towards close-quarters fights. As a result, we’ve added a Tac Laser to help with those moments where you need to reliably hip fire and equipped the 24 Round Mags. This magazine size only lowers your mobility and overall control by a tiny amount, so it’s well worth the four extra bullets you get. The fast ADS speed of this loadout also allows you to keep the G.I. Mini Reflex, but you could switch this out for another attachment if the normal iron sights don’t bother you. While the Burst perk may seem like a decent idea, we found that a quick trigger finger is more than enough to take down a target in a matter of seconds. Make sure you use this loadout to truly strike fear into your opponents.

Best Expedite 12 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionSeason 4’s buff to shotguns has seen them receive more attention. One of the shotguns to benefit most from these changes is the Expedite 12, a unique semi-auto that makes its debut in Warzone 2. This is the best Expedite 12 loadout to use to dominate in Warzone 2. The Season 4 update saw the Expedite 12 greatly buffed with the shotgun having a minimum damage range added to Warzone. This change means that the Expedite 12 will now always kill in three shots as long as enough pellets land. The Expedite 12 is a semi-auto shotgun based on the real-world Benelli M4 Super 90. Unlike most Call of Duty semi-auto shotguns, the Expedite is not ideal for spamming shots or hip-firing with it being a surprisingly precise weapon. To get the most out of the shotgun you’ll want to use this best Expedite 12 loadout possible for Warzone 2. Contents Best Expedite 12 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Expedite 12 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Expedite 12 in Warzone 2 – Best Expedite 12 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Expedite 12 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Bryson Choke (+0.09, +0.16) – Laser: 1mW Quick Fire Laser (-0.23, -51.00) – Stock: Resonance Stock Collapsed – Bolt: Expedite L-Bolt – Rear Grip: Schlager Fang Grip (+0.35, -0.45) – Unfortunately, the Expedite 12 doesn’t get access to a range-increasing barrel but we can use the Bryson Choke muzzle to at least improve its pellet spread. Stacking with the Season 4 buff, this makes its shots much more consistent and predictable within its effective range. Since this is a semi-auto shotgun we want to increase its fire rate where possible, and the best attachment for that is the Expedite L-Bolt. Since you’re going to need three shots to down an enemy having a faster fire rate is a must. A big selling point of the Expedite 12 is its fast handling which we can improve further by using attachments like the Resonance Stock Collapsed and Schlager Fang Grip. The main benefit of these is the greatly improved Spint to Fire Speed they provide allowing for more aggressive play. The last slot is flexible with the recommended 1mW Quick Fire Laser speeding up ADS time a little. Alternatively, some players may prefer to use a close-range optic like the Cronen Mini Pro as the Expedite 12’s iron sights can be tricky to use. Best Expedite 12 Warzone class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – First and foremost, Overkill is essential in any Shotgun loadout. It allows you to equip an AR or LMG to provide a long-range support option when not fighting up close. Another great Base Perk is Tracker which reveals the footsteps of nearby enemies. It’s great for tracking down targets that are running away and even catching opponents off guard. Spotter also makes sense with a shotgun as you’ll be running around a lot and constantly pushing buildings. This perk will make sure that you never get caught off guard by enemy equipment hidden around corners or behind doors. Finally, for the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. How to unlock the Expedite 12 in Warzone 2 Getting this gun unlocked is fairly simple, with the weapon being unlocked at Level 9. After just a few games, you’ll have this weapon in hand. Best Expedite 12 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the Expedite 12 doesn’t quite live up to your expectations, we recommend trying out the KV Broadside, another semi-auto shotgun albeit one that offers a more traditional experience than the Expedite. Alternatively, the Lockwood 300 has better range and can down targets in just two shots making it devastating in the right hands. For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Expedite 12 MW2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks Modern Warfare 2 | Infinity WardModern Warfare 2’s Expedite 12 is a powerful semi-auto shotgun with surprisingly good range that rivals both pump action alternatives. Here’s the best Expedite 12 loadout in MW2, complete with attachments, perks, and equipment. With Overkill being such a strong perk in Modern Warfare 2, it’s tempting to run shotguns like the Expedite 12 as a secondary. Whilst that’s viable it’s perfectly possible for MW2’s rendition of the real-world Benelli M4 to function as a primary weapon too. Even on some of MW2’s more open maps like El Asilo and Taraq, it’s fine to run a Shotgun as your main weapon. Doing so requires excellent map knowledge and an understanding of where the best areas for consistent close-range gunfights can be found, but it’s certainly possible. The main advantage of the Expedite 12 is that its fire semi-auto makes it more forgiving than both the pump action shotguns and the Lockwood 300. Missing out on a one-shot kill is not the end of the world as this shotgun can quickly follow up with a second shot. This build is focused on getting the most out of the Expedite 12 in MW2 multiplayer. If you’re looking for a powerful Warzone 2 Expedite 12 loadout instead, we’ve got a perfect choice. Contents Best Expedite 12 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Expedite 12 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the Expedite 12 – Alternative to the Expedite 12 loadout – Expedite 12 MW2 loadout: Setup and attachments Muzzle: Bryson Choke – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Resonance Stock Collapsed – Rear Grip: Schlager Void Grip – Bolt: Expedite L-Bolt – Despite being a semi-auto shotgun the Expedite 12 is more suited to shooting whilst aimed in than hip firing. This is because the spread of each shot is greatly reduced when aimed in making each pellet more likely to hit its mark. To capitalize on this it’s highly recommended to use the Bryson Choke and tune for ‘Tighter Pellet Spread’ and ‘Damage Range’. These are the two most important stats on a shotgun as they directly affect the range at which the Expedite 12 can secure one-shot kills. The next most important stat is mobility and to improve this you’ll want to equip both the Resonance Stock Collapsed and Schlager Void Grip. When combined these massively improve both the Expedite 12’s ADS and sprint-out speed. Next is an attachment that is unique to the Expedite 12, the Expedite L-Bolt. This bolt attachment noticeably speeds up our fire rate making the two-shot time to kill much faster. Given the Expedite’s tendency to require two shots, this is a fantastic option. Unusually for a shotgun, it’s recommended to use a close-range optic like the Cronen Mini Pro. Between shots, the Expedite 12 recoils heavily, and its iron sights obscure vision. Because of this, it can be easy to lose track of enemies between shots. Expedite 12 MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Bomb Squad – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – The perks in this class are all about staying mobile and on the move. Bomb Squad and Battle Hardened make it so that incoming tactical and lethal equipment is less effective. This is especially useful against proximity mines and claymores which can catch you out whilst moving. Fast Hands is a must as the Expedite 12 is a tube-fed shotgun meaning each shell is loaded one at a time. Without Fast Hands reloading all seven rounds into this shotgun takes several seconds which is an eternity in Call of Duty terms. In most situations, you will struggle to use a shotgun without Ghost. With MW2’s loud footsteps and UAVs being so strong it becomes incredibly hard to move around the map. With Ghost, you don’t have to be worried about the radar and can focus on getting in the right positions. Thermites are useful for flushing enemy players out of positions where you can’t reach them. If an enemy is sitting in a window just throw a thermite at them and then use that opportunity to close the gap. As for tactical equipment, the Stim is fantastic for the Expedite 12 as it lets you quickly heal between gunfights. Since this isn’t a pump action shotgun you don’t have to worry about not being able to pump whilst using stims either. How to unlock the Expedite 12 in Modern Warfare 2 Getting this gun unlocked is fairly simple, with the weapon platform being unlocked at Level 9. After just a few games, you’ll have this weapon in hand. The Expedite 12 is in its own platform and is therefore not used to unlock anything else. However, you will need to level it up to Level 7 to unlock the extremely popular Cronen Mini Pro optic. Alternatives to the Expedite 12 The Expedite 12 is a great way to get used to using Shotguns in MW2 due to its forgiving fire rate. However, it doesn’t quite have the same range potential as the Bryson 800 and 890 Shotguns, nor does it have the same rapid-fire potential as the double-barreled Lockwood 300. The most obvious alternative to the Expedite 12 is the KV Broadside. The KV Broadside is another semi-auto shotgun that was added in Season 2 that offers a more traditional experience revolving around spamming shots from the hip. While you’re here, check out some of our other Modern Warfare 2 guides: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | All Modern Warfare 2 perks

Best EX1 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe EX1 energy assault rifle is one of the most unique weapons in Warzone and you’ll need a top-tier loadout in Season 5 to maximize its power. Season 5 has finally kicked off in Warzone and the major update has introduced a huge amount of new content to the game. Whether it’s the Caldera map changes, the new Rage Serum Field Upgrade, or the lethal RA 225 SMG, it’s safe to say Raven hasn’t held back with the latest patch. However, out of all the additions, it’s the powerful EX1 energy assault rifle that’s garnering most of the attention. This unique weapon stands out from the rest of the arsenal thanks to its laser-like gunfire and futuristic sound effects. Of course, if you want to maximize the EX1’s damage, you’ll need a meta loadout and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best EX1 Warzone loadout – Best EX1 Warzone class – How to unlock the EX1 in Warzone – Alternative to the EX1 Warzone loadout – Best EX1 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Coil Amp – Barrel: SD Instant Grat – Optic: Mk. 3 Mod. 2 Sunfilter – Stock: AC-Titanium Anchor – Underbarrel: Ion Hand Stop – Magazine: Quantum High Voltage Battery – Rear Grip: Hatched Grip – Perk: Sleight of Hand – Perk2: On-Hand – First of all, you’ll want to equip the Coil Amp and SD Instant Grat barrel as these attachments boost the weapon’s damage, increase recoil stability, and ensures the gun remains in full-auto mode. While some of the muzzles transform the EX1 into a semi-automatic weapon, we prefer a full-auto build. After that, utilize the AC-Titanium Anchor, Ion Hand Stop, and Hatched Grip to bolster the weapon’s initial firing recoil and improve overall aiming stability. This will ensure your laser bullets always land on target and you can track enemies at medium range. As the EX1 doesn’t have an ammo-type slot, you don’t have to worry about that, but you’ll need to run the Quantum High Voltage Battery to boost the AR’s fire rate. Paired with the Mk. 3 Mod. 2 Sunfilter optic, you’ll be beaming down foes with ease. Finally, round off the loadout with Sleight of Hand to improve your reload speed and of course, the On-Hand perk so you are guaranteed to get the first shot off on your opponent in a gunfight. Best EX1 Warzone class Perks & Equipment When it comes to perks, our EX1 loadout runs the meta perk choices with EOD protecting you from explosive blasts, and Amped increasing your weapon swap speeds so you can easily switch to a powerful SMG. As our final choice, we recommend running the Overkill perk so you can use a meta SMG for close-range skirmishes. In the current meta, both the deadly Armaguerra 43 and H4 Blixen are top-tier choices. Finally, finish off the class with a Semtex to force enemies out of cover, or even stick one for an instant down, and a Stim to give you a boost of health. How to unlock the EX1 in Warzone Unlocking the EX1 in Warzone and Vanguard is relatively simple, as it only requires players to reach Rank 15 in the Season 5 Battle Pass. This shouldn’t take too long at all, so jump into a match as soon as possible so you can start lasering down your foes! Alternative to the EX1 Warzone loadout If energy rifles that shoot laser bullets are not what you’re looking for in Warzone, then it may be time to pick the Grau 5.56 back up in Season 5. The beloved Modern Warfare weapon received a hefty amount of buffs in the major patch, with its damage range and max damage being increased. This has caused its popularity to skyrocket so make sure to test it out in one of your matches and check out our dedicated loadout guide for the weapon. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. Best warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best equipment in Warzone: Stats reveal most popular lethal & tactical ActivisionNew stats have revealed the most popular and least popular equipment to use in Warzone, and the results might not be too surprising to anyone who grinds out matches in Verdansk. As the Call of Duty: Modern Warfare seasons have unfolded, the meta in Warzone has been shaken up a little bit. To kick things off, thermal scopes were all the rage, before players starting switching weapons and using LMGs. Since the Season 5 Reloaded update, the FiNN LMG has become the new toast of Verdansk, but you can’t end up the victor without having a stellar loadout. That means you’ve got to perfectly pick your equipment too. While most players will conform to the meta, others will stick with what they feel comfortable with. But what are the most popular pieces of equipment in Warzone up to now? Well, new stats from LootShare have revealed that perhaps unsurprisingly, C4 is by far and away the most popular piece of equipment in Warzone. According to the website’s data, it’s used by almost 80% of Warzone players. The heartbeat sensor, which can play a vital role in the late game, follows close behind with over 71% usage, making it the most popular tactical piece of equipment. Though it sits in third, the Stun Grenade lags way behind the top two with only 18% usage, while the fourth-placed Semtex is in the single digits at 5.4%. As for the least popular, that’s a closely fought battle between the Decoy Grenade and the Molotov Cocktail. While the latter can be deadly in the early, early part of a game, it only has a usage rate of 1.4%. The Decoy, on the other hand, doesn’t even reach 1.0%, clocking in at 0.6%. It might be surprising to some players that the Stim shot isn’t last, given that you auto regen health in Warzone, but it can be somewhat useful if you’re in a late-game firefight.

Best Einhorn Revolving Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup Sledgehammer GamesThere are a plethora of viable close-range weapons in Vanguard and the Einhorn Revolving is at the top of the pack. Here’s the best class to use if you’re looking to shut down those enemy SMG players. The Einhorn Revolving shotgun is a prototype build that crosses the mechanics of a six-shooter with the big boom of a traditional pellet-loaded shotgun. While that mix seems odd at first, the final result is a vicious crowd-controller that can keep up with any other shotty in the game. If you’re tired of being picked apart by those speedy MP-40 players consider trying out our carefully curated Einhorn loadout. Contents Best Einhorn Revolving loadout attachments – Best Einhorn Revolving class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the Einhorn Revolving in Vanguard – Alternatives to Einhorn Revolving Vanguard loadout – Best Einhorn Revolving Vanguard loadout Muzzle: M97 Full Choke – Stock: Klauser S2 – Optic: Slate Reflector – Underbarrel: SMLE Pistol Grip – Magazine: 12 Gauge 5 Round Cylinder – Ammo Type: Buck and Slug – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: Fully Loaded – This loadout is focused on maximizing one-shot potential so that each pull of the trigger can be focused on a new target. Our choice for the M97 Full Choke and SMLE Pistol Grip is all about making sure your aim and pellet spread are exactly aligned so that you’ll only have to take one pop at the enemy to secure a kill. The 12 Gauge 5 Round Cylinder adds some range to an otherwise limited loadout, which should help players from feeling trapped in any long hallways or fields without cover. Our picks for the Fabric Grip, Klauser S2 stock, and Slate Reflector optic are all about maintaining a good balance between hipfire and ADS accuracy, as you’ll need to rely on both to get the most out of this setup. The Sleight of Hand proficiency and Fully Loaded kit picks are necessities on the Einhorn, as the gun’s slow reload time and limited ammo pool would otherwise eat away its potential. Best Einhorn Revolving Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ninja – Perk 2: High Alert – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: Klauser Pistol – Lethal: Mk2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Field Upgrade: Dead Silence – All of the perks for this loadout are about maneuvering quickly and under the radar, keeping you safe while you stalk your prey. Using Ninja will keep you silent as you zoom around the map, making sure no opposing players get the drop on you first. The extended sprint distance of Double Time plus the early danger warning of High Alert should also keep you relatively safe while you close the distance on enemy teams. Adding the Klauser pistol as a secondary leaves some room for taking long-range gunfights, as the pistol has the best-in-class range in terms of sidearms, and the smoke grenade will be handy when you inevitably need to make a quick get away from a bad situation. How to unlock the Einhorn Revolving Shotgun The Einhorn Revolving is the first shotgun in the game and should be unlocked right away for all players If you’re looking to level the gun up fast, check for playlists that exclusively feature small maps, as the high engagement totals will speed your progression up. Alternatively, check your inventory for any spare Double Weapon XP tokens that you might have collected along the way. Alternatives to Einhorn Revolving loadout If you’re looking to keep a similar playstyle but find that the Einhorn isn’t working for you, the Combat Shotgun is the best partner to the Einhorn Revolving’s style. Both guns excel at punishing enemies for getting too close, and the Combat Shotgun’s one-shot-kill potential is unmatched when equipped with the right loadout.

Best Echo shotgun loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionCoD Mobile fans can wield a brand new weapon in the form of the semi-auto Echo shotgun in Season 10, The Hunt. So, here’s an early class setup that should have you topping the leaderboards. Call of Duty Mobile has finally made the leap to Season 10, which has been given the name of The Hunt. As had been confirmed during Season 9, Terminal is available as a multiplayer map, and Headquarters has finally debuted as a new mode. On top of that, you’ve also got a new weapon added to the weapon pool. Again, as expected, this is a shotgun with the Echo being added to the mix. Though it might be called Echo, Modern Warfare fans will recognize it as the Origin 12 Shotgun that has become a big part of the meta in Warzone. Best Echo shotgun class in CoD Mobile Season 10 Given that its such a popular weapon in Warzone, you might expect it to be super powerful in CoD Mobile – and you’d be right. Though, you do have to set it up in the right way. The shotgun has solid enough base damage and accuracy, but throw on both the Muzzle and the MIP Laser 5mW, and you’ll see things start to look even better. As you’ll be doing the majority of your fighting at close quarters, you’ll also want speed on your side. That’s why you should take the 12 Round Reload as your ammunition and Sleight of Hand as a perk. You’ll be able to reload super quick while in a jam. Muzzle: Choke. – Barrel: MIP Extended Light Barrel. – Laser: MIP Laser 5mW – Ammunition: 12 Round Reload – Perk: Sleight of Hand – How to unlock the Echo shotgun in CoD Mobile If you’re wondering how to unlock the new Shotgun, you don’t have to worry about having luck with the lucky draw or having to grind through 50 or so levels. No, instead, the weapon is available at level 21 of the Season 10 battle pass. Simply play some games, hit the required level, and you’ll then unlock the weapon. It really is that easy. Of course, to make sure you hit your full potential with the weapon, you will have to start from the bottom and play games with it. The more kills you rack up, the higher your weapon level will be, which means more attachments for you to use. So, happy hunting.

Best EBR-14 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe EBR-14 is an immensely powerful marksmen rifle in Warzone 2 that deletes enemies at long range with the correct attachments, luckily we’ve got a meta loadout for the weapon that maximizes its damage. While devastating close-range damage in Warzone 2 can be achieved using weapons like the Fennec 45, Lachmann Sub, and Minibak, picking off opponents from afar is just as important. However, selecting a sniper or marksmen rifle out of the countless options is a tough task, but there’s one that’s standing out from the crowd in the current meta, and that’s the EBR-14. This semi-automatic long-range rifle can delete foes with its impressive damage output, making it ideal for racking up kills on Al Mazrah. Despite this, to transform the weapon into a top-tier threat, you need to choose the correct attachments and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best EBR-14 Warzone 2 loadout – Best EBR-14 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the EBR-14 in Warzone 2 – Best EBR-14 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best EBR-14 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Husher-65 Silencer – Barrel: 22″ Boremaster – Optic: FTAC Charlie7 – Magazine: 20 Round Mag – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – For starters, you’ll want to equip the EBR-14 with the Husher-65 Silencer muzzle and the 22″ Boremaster barrel in Warzone 2. Both these options significantly increase the rifle’s bullet velocity and increase recoil smoothness, giving it the perfect combination of damage and stability. Next up, you’ll want to use the FTAC Ripper 56 to bolster the EBR-14’s kickback even more, allowing you to land as many shots as possible on your intended targets. This in conjunction with the FTAC Charlie7 optic gives you a clear sightline on your foes and allows you to lock onto opponents at long range. Finally, round off the loadout with the 20-Round Mag so you’re never limited on ammo and as the EBR-14 has a relatively fast fire rate, the extra bullets make it possible to wipe out an entire squad. Best EBR-14 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – While the Recon perk package is definitely a great choice for the EBR-14, we prefer Weapon Specialist due to the Overkill bonus, which adds a huge amount of versatility to the loadout. As mentioned above, this bundle includes Overkill which is essential when using a primary that solely is built for long-range. The ability to run a second primary allows you to equip a close-quarter SMG or sniper support-style weapon, ensuring you’re prepared for any gunfight, no matter the scenario. Next, Strong Arm allows you to be more precise with your throwables and launch them further. On top of that, Spotter ensures you’ll never be caught off guard by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. As for the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally round off the setup with a Grenade for flushing opponents out of cover and a Stun Grenade for clearing out buildings and campers. How to unlock the EBR-14 in Warzone 2 Luckily, the EBR-14 is unlocked automatically in Warzone 2 so you can start using this powerful rifle immediately in Al Mazrah. Best EBR-14 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the EBR-14 doesn’t fit your style of play, consider picking up the SP-R 208, another rifle that’s making waves on Al Mazrah. Capable of wiping out enemies with ease at long range, it’s definitely another top-tier contender, so check out our dedicated loadout guide to maximize its damage. That’s all for our EBR-14 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best EBR-14 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks ActivisionThe EBR-14 is one of Modern Warfare 2’s best Marksman Rifles, especially when using the best attachments. Here’s the best EBR-14 loadout in MW2, complete with attachments, Perks, and equipment. Marksman rifles always have a niche following in CoD games. Single-fire weapons require patience and a playstyle far less approachable than fully automatic weapons. Anyone can pick up an SMG or AR and find moderate success through running and gunning, but the same can’t be said for Marksman Rifles. The underrated class only excels in medium to long-range combat, but fortunately, Modern Warfare 2 caters to these weapons better. MW2 features larger maps than usual CoD titles and five Ground War maps specifically designed for 32v32 combat. Veteran CoD fans will know the EBR-14 from classic titles, and the powerful rifle is absolutely deadly in Modern Warfare 2. If you want to maximize the potential of this weapon, then you need our best loadout. Contents Best EBR-14 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best EBR-14 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the EBR-14 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the EBR-14 loadout – Best EBR-14 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Polarfire-S – Barrel: 22″ Boremaster Barrel – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: SO R55 Adaptor – Rear Grip: FSS Gen.7 Grip – Receiver: EBR-14 – We went for a balance between mobility and damage output with this EBR-14 loadout. The Polarfire-S Muzzle increases bullet velocity, damage range, and recoil smoothness at the cost of aim-down sight speed and aiming stability. The 22″ Boremaster Barrel also increases bullet velocity and increases recoil control at the cost of aim-down sight speed and movement speed. If you are worried about moving around like a snail after the first two attachments, don’t worry. Using the SO R55 Adaptor Stock increases sprint speed and aim down sight speed, and the FSS Gen.7 Rear Grip does as well. Best EBR-14 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Bomb Squad – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Quick Fix – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Stim – Combining Bomb Squad and Battle Hardened transforms your Operator into a juggernaut. Bomb Squad reduces damage from explosives, while Battle Hardened essentially nullifies the impact from tactical grenades. Marksman Rifles struggle with slower reload times, so Fast Hands giving you a faster reload time should help in close-call situations. Quick Fix is an underrated Ultimate Perk that regenerates health for every kill or for holding objectives. Drill Charges can pierce straight through walls to take out unsuspecting campers, and getting a quick boost of health from a Stim always comes in handy while in a crunch. How to unlock the EBR-14 in Modern Warfare 2 Fortunately for you, the EBR-14 is automatically unlocked, so there is no need to do any tedious unlock process through Weapon Platforms. Alternative to the EBR-14 loadout If you do not get along with the EBR-14, we recommend trying out the TAQ-V Battle Rifle. The weapon has a similar profile to the EBR-14 but can fire fully automatically. The Battle Rifle dominates medium-range engagements, and its auto-firing mode makes it more approachable than other class offerings. Now that you have the best EBR-14 loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2| How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field UpgradesAdChoices

Best DR-H Assault Rifle loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionThe DR-H is Call of Duty: Mobile’s newest weapon, but what is the best set-up and class for it? Well, there are a few tips and tricks that you should follow for now. As new seasons have been rolled out for Call of Duty: Mobile, players have been able to play some classic CoD maps from different games. Classic weapons and characters have been introduced as well, giving the mobile game a fresh coat of paint. With the start of Season 8: The Forge, Call of Duty: Mobile players are able to get their hands on a new weapon – the DR-H assault rifle. The weapon, which is your usual SCAR-H, is unlockable via the battle pass at tier 21, but what is the best class setup for it? Well, popular YouTuber BobbyPlays has got a few tips that should help you run riot against enemies in your enemies. Best DR-H class in CoD Mobile From the get-go, the DR-H packs a mighty punch compared to some of the other weapons in CoD Mobile. However, it can be boosted by the OTM attachment to take its damage over the 85 rating mark. On top of that, Extended Mags is an essential attachment to use because the weapon only has 20 bullets in its normal magazines. You can forego a scope as well and just use Quickdraw as the third attachment. Foregrip and Stock are useable as well, however, Quickdraw should give you a bigger boost in your mission to gun down enemies. DR-H Assault Rifle best attachments Extended Mags – OTM – Quickdraw – Obviously, when it comes to perks and the likes, you might have your own set-up that you’re comfortable with for most classes. However, the YouTuber recommends Lightweight, Toughness, and Dead Silence. As BobbyPlays demonstrates, the weapon can very much melt opponents who happen to find themselves on the wrong side of the DR-H. If the weapon proves to be a little too overpowered, the CoD Mobiles will likely roll out a patch in the future, but for now, it might be the best weapon in the game so try it out.

Best DP27 CoD Vanguard class loadout: attachments, perks, proficiency, setup ActivisionLight Machine Guns can be the strongest weapons in all of Call of Duty: Vanguard. Moreso, the DP27 is a heavy hitter, here’s the best class loadout with attachments, perks, and proficiency. LMGs have always been in the Call of Duty franchise but can be overlooked due to their poor mobility stats. However, one of the first LMGs unlocked in the game and is arguably the best in the weapon class is the DP27 as it has great damage and doesn’t slow you down too much. This gun can be used as a hybrid assault rifle and has insane DPS. Here’s the best DP27 class loadout that will have you setup to drop an insane number of kills. Contents Best DP27 Vanguard loadout – Best DP27 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock DP27 in Vanguard – Alternatives to DP27 Vanguard loadout – Best DP27 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Kovalevskaya 604MM – Optic: Monocular Reflector – Stock: ZAC S2M – Underbarrel: Heavy Foregrip – Magazine: 7.62x54MMR 105 Round Pans – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Hardscope – Kit: Fully Loaded – To start with the best DP27 loadout, use the Recoil Booster because it increases the rate of fire. Use this with the Kovalevskaya 604MM because this boosts its fire rate, range, and accuracy. For the Optic, it usually is a personal preference but the Monocular Reflector is a good and safe option. The Heavy Foregrip provides no cons and helps improve the aiming stability and recoil control on the DP27. The ZAC S2M is another key attachment as the stock heavily reduces the recoil on the LMG making it easy to control. Use it with Stippled Grip for the maximum amount of recoil control possible. Next, you’ll want to use the 7.62x54MMR 105 Round Pans because it gives the DP27 105 bullets in one mag. This works well with the Hardscope Proficiency as it improved accuracy and recoil control the longer you ADS. Read More: How to fix CoD Vanguard dev error 5537 – To top off the DP27, use Lengthened to increase the bullet velocity. But FMJ could be viable as well as you can wallbang enemies with it. Pair it up with Fully Loaded and have over 500 bullets to rack up kills. Best DP27 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Piercing Vision – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: No 69 Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Dead Drop – For the DP27 you will want to use the Ghost perk as Spy Planes are spammed in matches. Piercing Vision is great on LMGs and especially the DP27 as it will highlight enemies through the wall after tagging them with bullets. This can be really strong with FMJ for free kills. To round out the perks use Double Time so you can get back into the fight as quickly as possible and post up in your position. The Machine Pistol is a great secondary as it has enough bullets and damage to finish off enemies that get too close to you. For equipment, the MK2 Frag Grenade and No 69 Stun Grenade are perfect options and set up kills for the DP27. Round it out with the Dead Drop Field Upgrade to pop out as many killstreaks as possible. How to unlock DP27 in Vanguard It is quite simple to unlock the DP27 in CoD Vanguard. All you need to do is reach level 18 and the LMG will be yours. Take advantage of the 24/7 playlists on Shipment and Das Haus and you should reach that in just a few hours of gameplay. Alternatives to DP27 Vanguard loadout If you’ve unlocked everything on the DP27 and want to try something else then give the Bren a shot. Although you don’t unlock this until level 53, it is very strong with the right loadout. However, the DP27 is very easy to unlock and packs a mean punch so definitely give it a try and see if it suits your playstyle. Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best Vanguard controller settings | Unlock Atomic camo

Best Double Barrel Shotgun Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best Double Barrel Shotgun Warzone loadout will have you wiping squads in the blink of an eye, and we’ve got all the strongest Attachments and Perks needed to reign supreme with a dual-wield setup in Season 1. CoD Vanguard’s Double Barrel Shotgun is one of the strongest weapons in Warzone Pacific. While it’s decent at first, the right attachments can boost it into one the most powerful Shotgun across both Caldera and Rebirth Island. From the best Perks to the optimal Attachments, here’s everything you need to equip the best Double Barrel Shotgun in Warzone Season 1. Contents Best Double Barrel Shotgun Warzone loadout – Best Double Barrel Shotgun setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Double Barrel Shotgun in Warzone – Alternatives to Double Barrel Shotgun Warzone loadout – Best Double Barrel Shotgun Warzone loadout Muzzle: M97 Full Choke – Barrel: LJ-18 Defender – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: Removed Stock – Underbarrel: (Disabled due to Akimbo Perk) – Magazine: Leave empty – Ammo Type: Incendiary – Rear Grip: Pine Tar Grip – Perk 1: Akimbo – Perk 2: Quick – With 10 attachments to pick from, our Double Barrel class focuses on one specific playstyle. The goal here is to improve hip-fire accuracy and movement speed across the board in order to maximize damage output with a dual-wield setup. To start out, the most important attachments are the Perks. We’ve settled on Akimbo and Quick to enable dual-wielding while boosting your sprint speed. These Perks combine to create one of the most powerful loadouts in Warzone today, and it only gets stronger with the remaining picks. Next up is the M97 Full Choke Muzzle, an essential pick to reduce pellet spread. Rather than coating a large radius in weaker damage, this attachment shrinks that radius to focus all damage in a tighter circle. The LJ-18 Defender Barrel comes in next to improve damage, hip fire damage, and even damage range as well. It’s an effective pick for multiple reasons, but given the Akimbo setup, none are more important than its boost to hip fire damage. It’s crucial to note that two attachments are out of the equation with this Double Barrel Shotgun class in Warzone. First, the Underbarrel is disabled as a result of the Akimbo Perk. Second, with only two Magazines to choose from, we recommend sticking with the default option instead. Neither attachment is worth a look. Rounding things out, we have the Incendiary Ammo Type to further improve damage. With just one pellet needed to apply fire damage over time, there’s no better pick for almost any Shotgun build in Warzone today. Last but not least is the Pine Tar Rear Grip and the G16 2.5x Optic to add the final buffs. The former improves hip fire accuracy while the latter improves overall accuracy. Combined with our previous picks, your aim will now be optimized to help every shot reach its target. Best Double Barrel Shotgun Warzone setup (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Tempered – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Diamatti – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Running this Double Barrel Shotgun loadout in Warzone requires a few unique picks in terms of equipment. While EOD is still a staple, it’s crucial you run with Tempered and Amped in the final slots. Tempered keeps you in the fight by allowing you to armor up quicker than usual. Rather than wasting valuable time filling out three plates, you only need two to reach max health with Tempered equipped. Meanwhile, Amped is essential to swap weapons in the blink of an eye. With dual-wield Diamattis on standby, you’ll be taking down entire squads without having to reload. Just enter with the Double Barrels and finish with the Diamattis. When it comes to Lethal and Tactical picks, there’s no looking past the standard Frag Grenade along with Stims. Popping a Stim at the right time can give an enormous speed boost as you leap towards an enemy team. There’ll be no stopping you if you can time the buff perfectly. How to unlock the Double Barrel Shotgun in Warzone All that’s required to unlock the Double Barrel Shotgun in Warzone is to reach level 49. The moment you hit this level, you’ll have access to the powerful primary weapon. Obviously, this process can be sped up through the use of double XP codes and even bonus XP weekends when available. We recommend completing contracts or dropping into Plunder to help along the way. Alternatives to the Double Barrel Shotgun Warzone loadout If a close-range build isn’t your style, you can always swap over to a mid-range SMG loadout instead. That’s where our ultimate PPSh-41 Warzone class comes into play. With the right set of attachments, you’ll be beaming entire teams without a hassle. It provides slightly more range than the Double Barrel Shotguns with a faster fire rate to boot. So there you have it, the full rundown on the very best Double Barrel Shotgun loadout in Warzone today. With new patches changing things up every week, however, there’s a good chance our build will be impacted by future updates. Rest assured, we’ll continue to refresh this setup over the coming weeks to reflect any big shake-ups in the meta. For now, be sure to check out some more devastating Warzone loadouts below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Top class setups and best weapons | 10 best Warzone players | Automaton loadout | MP40 loadout

Best DMR-14 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Treyarch/ActivisionAfter a buff to its recoil in the Season 5 Reloaded patch, the DMR-14 is definitely a decent medium-range weapon in Warzone Pacific Season 1, especially if you’re using a powerful loadout. There’s no denying that the DMR-14 isn’t the weapon it was back at the end of 2020. For a period of time, you couldn’t face anybody in the game without them having a DMR or MAC-10 in their hands. To combat this, Raven nerfed the DMR, leaving it relatively unpopular among the community for a long time. Now, months after a buff to its recoil in the Season 5 Reloaded update, the tactical rifle has carved out a niche in the meta. Even though it isn’t the most popular weapon currently, it’s incredible in medium-range gunfights and with the right attachments. Contents Best DMR-14 loadout for Warzone – Best DMR-14 setup (Perks & Equipment) – How to unlock the DMR-14 in Warzone – Alternative DMR-14 loadout – Best DMR-14 loadout for Warzone Attachments Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Muzzle: Agency Silencer – Underbarrell: Field Agent Foregrip – Barrel: 16.3 Titanium Barrel – Ammunition: 30 Rnd – There have been two key attachment changes to the meta DMR-14 loadout since its release back in 2020. The first addition is the 16.3 Titanium barrel that massively increases the gun’s fire rate. This allows you to rain down bullets on your opponents, leaving them no chance to win a gunfight at medium range. Next, the Salvo 40 Rnd Fast Mag has been replaced by the standard 30 Rnd Mag. This simple change is just to avoid the aim down sight speed lost by using the Fast Mag. Read More: 10 most popular weapons in Warzone – Moving onto the optics, the Axial Arms 3x is the perfect scope for the DMR as it thrives at medium range and allows you to land consistent headshots with the weapon. After that, the Field Agent Foregrip helps to control the weapon’s recoil and allows you to lock onto your target. This out of every attachment so far is an absolute must-use as it counters the DMR’s heavy vertical recoil. Finally, moving onto the muzzle, the Agency Silencer is an incredible choice for the DMR. The attachment provides the weapon with increased damage range and, as everyone knows, a silencer in Warzone can be a huge game-changer. Best DMR-14 setup (Perks & equipment) Perks Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – When it comes to perks, EOD and Amped are always strong choices as they protect you from explosive damage as well as allowing you to swap weapons as quickly as possible. Pairing these up with Overkill is by far the best option when it comes to the DMR, as it allows you to run an SMG like the MP40 in the secondary slot in case an opponent decides to push your position. Round off the loadout with a Frag Grenade to force enemies out from behind cover, and the Heartbeat Sensor so you can track opponents attempting to remain undetected. How to unlock the DMR-14 in Warzone Luckily, Raven have made unlocking the DMR-14 in Warzone relatively simple, meaning there’s no complicated challenge to complete. All players have to do is reach level 49, which may take quite a few games, but can be sped up by playing Black Ops Cold War Multiplayer. Alternative DMR-14 loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the DMR-14, check out our M16 loadout. It’s quite similar, but is a burst rifle and is still capable of taking out enemies at medium to long-range with ease. While it’s certainly not a top-tier meta weapon, it’s perfect for players who prefer a less aggressive style and like to take out opponents from a distance. Hopefully, that’s set you up with a DMR 14 loadout that’ll help you win more Warzone matches and dominate your opponents. It may not be the DMR of old, but this weapon still certainly packs a punch and will always serve you well on Caldera. Make sure to check out our other Warzone guides and lists to dominate in Warzone Pacific Season 1: | Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Mac-10 loadout | Best landing spots | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best DM56 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionMarksman rifles are fierce weapons to use in Warzone, and the DM56 is one of the best choices in Season 4 Reloaded. Here are the details on the best loadout build for the match dominance. While it may seem strange, marksman rifles have had moments where they’ve dominated the Warzone meta. In particular, the DMR from Black Ops Cold War sent shivers down every player’s back. The weapon category has been relatively quiet since then, but MW3‘s arrival brings a suite of new marksman rifles to work with all capable of dominating the lobby. One standout is the semi-auto DM56 due to its best-in-class rate of fire. Best DM56 loadout – DM56 loadout: perks and equipment – How to unlock DM56 in Warzone – Best DM56 alternative – Best DM56 Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Barrel: Prime Lord Heavy Barrel – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – Marksman rifles are good primaries in Warzone as you’ll deal tons of damage at any range. However, the tradeoff is your movement speed, strafe speed in particular, and firing speed, since it’s semi-auto, are horrendous. When building your DM56, you’ll want to keep those two downsides in mind. The VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor muzzle helps keep your movement speed up by a hint, allowing for improved strafe speeds while also giving you some recoil control. This will be continued with the Prime Lord Heavy Barrel and Bruen Heavy Support Grip to help keep your firing stability in check while moving. Finally, the 40-round mag is much better than the 20-round default, and the Corio Eagleseye 2.5x is a great sight to use at any range. DM56 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. Health regeneration will not trigger while in the gas. – – Perk 4: Resolute Move faster when hit by an enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – When using the DM56, you have to keep in mind close-range engagements are your weakness, so you’ll want to hang back and control the tempo. Sleight of Hand keeps you in action with faster reloads, while Doube Time will allow you to use your Tac Sprint much faster. Throw on Quick FIx to keep your health as high as possible through kickstarting regeneration when inserting a plate. Use Resolutet to get an even greater boost to mobility whenever you are hit by an enemy. Smoke Grenades in Warzone are a great choice since getting caught in the open marks a death sentence. Meanwhile, a Throwing Knife will take out your enemies with speed and precision. Keep in mind that Overkill is a default Perk now, meaning you can choose any primary as a secondary now, no Perk needed. Carry around a reliable weapon such as the WSP Swam, Rival-9, or Striker 9 all superb options in a pinch. How to unlock the DM56 in Warzone To unlock the DM56, you must complete the required Armory challenge. In this case, reach level 25 and complete 3 daily challenges to unlock the weapon. You can also extract it in MWZ to unlock it. Best DM56 alternative As an alternative, the MCW 6.8 boasts the best damage in the marksman rifles class. Conversely, you can look at running something a bit more forgiving such as the MCW assault rifle. The DM56 is not the only weapon that can excel in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, so learn more about the FJX Horus, Superi 46, MCW, and Kar98k.

Best DM56 MW3 Loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks Marksman rifles are typically known for their precision, but the DM56 is unique as its strengths are in handling and mobility instead. By using this best DM56 loadout in MW3 you can take advantage of this with ease. Even now in MW3 Season 3, the DM56 has largely avoided any nerfs since launch. This means that it is just as good as day one if not arguably even better as new attachments added in recent seasons have elevated it to an even higher level. What makes the DM56 so unique is that it’s a marksman rifle that specializes in fast handling and mobility. This may sound strange, but it can be incredible in the right hands, especially if you use a meta loadout. This is the best DM56 loadout including attachments, perks, and equipment to get the most out of this fast-handling marksman rifle. Contents Best DM56 MW3 loadout – Best DM56 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the DM56 in MW3 – Best DM56 alternative in MW3 – Best DM56 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Zehm35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: Chrios-6 Match – Optic: MORS Dot Sight – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Ammunition: 5.56 NATO High Grain Rounds – With the DM56 having such good handling it’s best to build it around this and make it feel like a DMR-SMG hybrid. For this, you’ll want to use the DR-6 Handstop and Chrios-6 Match which boosts ADS Speed, Sprint To Fire Speed, and several key mobility stats. However, it is important to remember this is still a precision weapon. As such, iron sights simply don’t cut it and you’ll want to use a meta optic like the MORS Dot Sight introduced in Season 3. This optic’s reticle is incredibly clear and easy to use at close to medium range which is where the DM56 excels. Although the DM56 is stronger up close it can still be a threat from afar. This is especially true with the 5.56 NATO High Grain Rounds equipped which massively improve damage range. However, this will worsen recoil control which can be mitigated with a muzzle like the VLK Koloss Flash Hider. Best DM56 class: Perks & equipment Vest: CCT Comms Vest Zooms out the minimap, increases how long enemies stay on the minimap, and makes defeated enemies drop intel packs which can be collected for additional radar pings. – – Gloves: Marksman Gloves Reduced sway and flinch while ADS. – – Boots: Stalker Boots Increased strafe and ADS movement speed. – – Gear: Threat Identification System While ADS, automatically pings enemy locations in crosshairs. – – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset Reduces player combat and environmental sounds to allow improved focus on hearing other footsteps. – – With the DM56 being an exceptional mobile weapon it makes sense to use perks like Stalker Boots and CCT Comms Vest which make it easier to push other players. However, it is still a marksman rifle so being precise is important. It is therefore recommend to use the Stalker Boots to avoid being flinched off target. These specific gear perks aren’t essential for this DM56 loadout but the Threat Identification System works well as you are going to be aiming down sights for all of your kills anyway. Why don’t gain the extra benefit of free pings for doing so? Meanwhile, the Bone Conduction Headset is always a strong option for hearing enemy footsteps and cutting off enemies trying to flank you. How to unlock the DM56 in Modern Warfare 3 The DM56 is acquired as an Armory Unlock, first accessible after reaching Level 25. Once activated in the Armory you need to complete 3 Daily Challenges or win 3 matches. Best DM56 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The best DM56 alternative is the MCW 6.8 which is another fast-handling DMR that has been adapted from an MW3 assault rifle, in this case, the MCW. Be sure to check out our other MW3 content to stay ahead: Best MW3 loadouts | MTZ Interceptor loadout | KVD Enforcer loadout | Longbow loadout | KV Inhibitor loadout

Best DM-10 loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoThe DM-10 is a fast-firing marksman rifle in Black Ops 6 that can be lethal in the right hands, especially with a meta loadout that makes the most of its strengths. Alongside the Tanto .45, the DM-10 was the other gun added in the beta’s second weekend, bringing new life to the meta. It’s arrival fills a niche that wasn’t covered before – a rapid-fire semi-auto rifle that rewards precision, much like the DM56 and MCW 6.8 from Modern Warfare 3. Therefore, this gun should appeal to those who enjoyed using those weapons. What you don’t want to do is play slow and try to use this like a true marksman rifle. It is generally not worth going for headshots; you are better off landing consistent body shots and spamming the trigger for the best time to kill possible. This gun is tricky to use at first, but once you level it up, it becomes noticeably stronger. That’s especially true if you use our recommended DM-10 loadout that features the best attachments, perks, and equipment possible. Best DM-10 Black Ops 6 loadout Optic: Kepler Microflex – Muzzle: Compensator – Barrel: Long Barrel – Rear Grip: Quickdraw Grip – Stock: Heavy Stock – Since the DM-10 cannot kill in one shot, even with a headshot, there isn’t that much value in using its default scope. Instead, you’ll want to equip a meta optic like the Kepler Microflex to make it much easier to use up close. Speaking of ease of use, the Compensator and Heavy Stock are a great combination, with the muzzle reducing recoil and the stock reducing flinch. These help keep shots on target and let this marksman rifle hold its own against other long-range weapons. While the DM-10 can kill in just two shots, its damage ranges are fairly short, making this unlikely most of the time. Using the Long Barrel mitigates this by increasing the gun’s damage range, making it more likely that you’ll down a foe in just two shots. The Quickdraw Grip is the last attachment you’ll want to use, as it improves the gun’s aim down sight speed. Being able to aim in faster is always useful, especially given how fast paced Black Ops 6’s gameplay can be at times. Best DM-10 class: Perks, Equipment & Combat Specialty The best combat speciality to use with the DM-10 is Recon, which lets you see enemies through walls every time you spawn. This invaluable intel is great for pre-aiming angles and catching out players trying to flank your team. Here are the perks and equipment you’ll want to run to gain Recon’s benefits: Wildcard: Perk Greed – Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Forward Intel – Perk 3: Cold-Blooded – Perk 4: Dexterity – Lethal: Combat Axe – Tactical: Concussion – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – To activate Recon, you’ll need to use three blue perks. While there are several good options, the best by far is Ghost, which makes you undetectable by enemy UAVs and radar pings. Just keep in mind that this only works when you are moving, so you’ll want to avoid standing still for too long. The other two perk slots should be used on Forward Intel, to increase the minimap size and show the direction that enemies are facing, and Cold-Blooded, preventing AI killstreaks from targeting you. These perks keep you alive by offering protection and intelligence, which are both important in Call of Duty. By using the Perk Greed wildcard, you get access to a fourth perk slot. While there are several good options, Dexterity is one of the most appealing, as it reduces weapon motion as you run around. With a precision gun like the DM-10, less unnecessary screen shake is always handy. For lethal equipment, use a Combat Axe when you are in a pinch, as it can be thrown to instantly kill anyone it hits. If you prefer to be the aggressor, a Concussion grenade is great for stunning enemies, leaving them vulernable. Finally, a Trophy System is a defensive field upgrade that can be used to block enemy equipment and capture points to help your team win more games. How to unlock DM-10 The DM-10 is unlocked by reaching level 25, making it one of the hardest guns to unlock in the beta. After getting the marksman rifle, you’ll need to progress through 46 gun levels to acquire all of its unique attachments. Best DM-10 alternative in Black Ops 6 The SVD is the only other semi-auto rifle in the beta, offering superior damage to the DM-10 at the cost of fire rate. It’s a great option for those who prefer precision to firing quickly, as this sniper rifle is capable of one shot kills. Be sure to check out our Black Ops 6 tier list to see how all the other guns compare to the DM-10, or try out a range of meta builds, including this Jackal PDW loadout, AMES 85 loadout, C9 loadout, and LR 7.62 loadout.

Best graphics settings for Modern Warfare on PC, PS4 and Xbox One Whether you’re looking for a more immersive experience, or are looking to optimize your settings for better in-game performance, Call of Duty: Modern Warfare boasts a wealth of custom visual settings that can be adjusted to cater for your needs. Any iteration to the Call of Duty franchise is a guaranteed spectacle marvel, but with more display options than ever before, Modern Warfare takes optimization to another level. A wide array of options are available to change. From making adjustments to post-processing effects (such as depth of field), to tailoring textures (such as the in-game film grain), Infinity Ward have taken steps to ensure that their game is visually pleasing. However, as is often the case, some games require a compromise on the aesthetic aspects to allow for smoother performance. So here’s how to optimize the graphics in Modern Warfare to suit your needs. Best PC settings for visuals in Modern Warfare Given the praise that has been directed towards Infinity Ward’s realistic rendition of ongoing warfare through the campaign, players will want to see it for all its worth. Hardware permitting, there is a seemingly endless list of options that players can take advantage of. Primarily, players will want to maximize the render resolution (in-line with what their monitor is capable of) while enabling V-Sync frame rate capping to prevent screen tearing. Moreover, ensure ‘Details & Textures’ options are set to ‘High’ to guarantee a more realistic output. Real-time raytracing Alongside integrating a series of adjustable options, those looking for a more engaging, true-to-life experience have the choice to enable ‘DirectX Raytracing’ in conjunction with Nvidia. YouTuber Drift0r has detailed how to enable the setting, alongside showcasing the real-time effects of shadows appearing more realistic, and thus, more providing a more immersive and lifelike experience — note this setting is only compatible with an RTX–series graphics card. Best PC setting for performance in Modern Warfare Since the aforementioned settings aren’t necessarily geared towards multiplayer, here’s how to accommodate for the fast-paced action. For performance, players will want to maximize their screen refresh rate and frames per second — a feature embedded into the Graphics Options of Modern Warfare. However, to push this to the maximum, it is likely that you will have to compromise on the aesthetics front, by toggling highlights, shadows and texture–related settings off/lower. Some settings however, like shadows, are still important for gameplay, and so should be kept slightly higher. Digital Foundry have made a comprehensive video that guides players through the majority of visual settings and the implications of adjusting them. What about Modern Warfare on PS4 and Xbox? Although consoles are somewhat limited by their hardware, Infinity Ward has managed to find several loopholes that allow for an element of customization. One major feature which can be adjusted is ‘Film Grain’. Set to 0.25 by default, reducing the visual noise down to 0.00 will create a smoother rendering of the map in-game. Alongside modifying grain, players can toggle both World Motion Blur and Weapon Motion Blur to change the simulated blur overlaid onto the game that is designed to replicate a similar effect experienced when moving in real-life. There’s a host of settings that can be changed in Modern Warfare. However, it is recommended that the above is used purely as a guide, and we recommend that you tailor your game’s settings to suit your needs through trial and error.

Best DG-58 LSW Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The DG-58 LSW emerged as a surprise top-tier option making a serious push to be one of the strongest LMGs in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. This is the best loadout to use in the game and get the most out of this meta primary. While there’s some overlap with multiplayer and Warzone it isn’t uncommon for a gun that excels in one to remain largely unused in the other. Warzone 2 saw this across multiple metas with the likes of the M13B and TAQ-V. The latest and most extreme example of this is the DG-58 LSW, an LMG inspired by the real-world QBZ-95. It’s an extremely well-rounded and accurate machine gun that despite being hardly touched in multiplayer has quickly become one of the most used guns in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Here’s the best DG-58 LSW Warzone loadout to dominate and win games with ease. Best DG-58 LSW Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: Wudi Long Barrel – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Stock: Recoil Reduction Buttplate – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – The DG-58 is an incredibly easy LMG to master given its forgiving recoil pattern. However, since this loadout is about making it better than it already is, adding the VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor massively improves the LMG’s recoil control. It also increases the bullet velocity and range, meaning it’ll be consistent at nearly every range. Continuing the theme of recoil control, both the Recoil Reduction Buttplate stock and Bruen Heavy Support Grip massively reduce recoil and make the LSW much more accurate. With these three attachments, it’s possible to down enemies from hundreds of meters away which is impressive for a full auto weapon. Finally, the Wudi Long Barrel is great as it further improves the LMG’s long-range capabilities while the Corio Eagleeye 2.5x optic is the best choice for medium to long-range engagements thanks to the clear sights it provides. DG-58 LSW Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Inserting a plate or killing another player will trigger health regeneration – – Perk 4: Resolute 5% speed boost when hit with an enemy bullet – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – For Perk Slot 1, Double Time works well as it improves Tactical Sprint by doubling its duration and reducing refresh time. Combining that with Sleight of Hand makes sense with the DG-58 LSW as these perks address common issues with most LMGs — mobility, and reload speed. Quick Fix is a nice option in Perk slot 3 with it kickstarting your health regeneration quickly whenever you insert an armor plate. This will help you stay alive much longer and be able to endure more damage during a fight. The new Resolute Perk works extremely well with LMGs like the DG-58 LSW. When equipped it grants a short bonus to movement speed after being shot. This allows for movement that just isn’t ordinarily possible with an LMG which can be used to get to cover and dodge incoming fire. A Throwing Knife is a classic choice for lethal equipment. It is a quick way to down an enemy provided you have done enough damage to them beforehand. Finally, the best tactical is a Smoke Grenade which can be deployed to create improvised cover when needed. How to unlock DG-58 LSW in Warzone The DG-58 LSW is unlocked by reaching level 7 in either Warzone, multiplayer, or Zombies. Alternatively, extracting with the LMG in Zombie will also unlock it. Best alternative to DG-58 LSW in Warzone The best alternative to the DG-58 LSW is the Bruen Mk9, another accurate LMG that offers a competitive TTK, controllable recoil, and even a fast reload making it a great choice for Warzone. Keeping your damage at a solid amount from a distance is a great option in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, so check out other options like the MORS, Kar98k, and KATT-AMR.

Best DG-58 LSW MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe DG-58 LSW is now one of the best weapons in MW3 following an incredible glow-up. Here’s the best loadout to dominate multiplayer using the meta LMG. While once a forgettable LMG that very few people used, the buffs in MW3 Season 3 Reloaded have elevated the DG-58 LSW making it undoubtedly meta. It is now far more accurate and hits harder offering one of the best TTKs in Modern Warfare 3. This unbelievable glow-up has seen the DG-58 LSW feature in more and more players’ classes. If you want to take advantage of this buffed gun like they are you’ll need the best loadout possible. Here is the best DG-58 loadout to use in Modern Warfare 3 multiplayer that looks to make it as accurate as possible while also optimizing handling and mobility. Contents Best DG-58 LSW MW3 loadout – Best DG-58 LSW class: Perks and equipment – How to unlock DG-58 LSW in Modern Warfare 3 – Best DG-58 LSW alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best DG-58 LSW MW3 loadout Muzzle: Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Recoil Reduction Buttplate – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Comb: FSS Last Stand Comb – After its recoil control buff in Season 3 Reloaded it is now possible to make the DG-58 LSW incredibly accurate. This can be done by stacking attachments that reduce recoil, most notably the Zahmn35 Compensated Flash Hider and Recoil Reduction Buttplate. Another big advantage of this buff is that it frees up other attachments to be used to improve the LMG’s relatively slow handling. To speed up how fast it handles you should use both the DR-6 Handstop and FSS Last Stand Comb. The main benefit of these two attachments is that they provide a 16% improvement to ADS speed and a huge 25% boost to Sprint to Fire Speed. With these two attachments equipped the DG-58 LSW has handling and mobility closer to an assault rifle than an LMG. This is a massive upside that makes it possible to play far more aggressively with this build than with other LMG classes. Round off the loadout by equipping a suitable medium-range sight like the JAK Glassless Optic. Although several optics are viable on the DG-58 LSW, the JAK Glassless Optic stands out as the best overall option thanks to its clear reticle and ease of use. Best DG-58 LSW class: Perks & equipment Vest: Gunner Vest Deploy with max ammo and improved reload speed. – – Gloves: Assault Gloves While jumping, accuracy and time to ADS is improved. – – Gear: EOD Padding Reduces damage from non-killstreak enemy explosives and enemy fire. – – Lethal: Proximity Mine Proximity-triggered explosive that launches in the air, and deals heavy damage to the surrounding area. – – Tactical: Stim Military stimulant that promotes clotting to close wounds quickly and refreshes Tactical Sprint. – – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – With the Gunner Vest, you spawn in with max ammo as well as a second primary weapon slot. We advise using this on something that can do serious damage at close range like the HRM-9 or RAM-9. Close-range guns like these help cover up the DG-58 LSW’s shortcomings with the LMG being more suited to medium and long-range encounters. The Assault Gloves don’t necessarily compliment the DG-58 LSW all that well, but they do provide a more mobile option for when going on the offensive is required. These gloves reduce various penalties on jump shots letting you catch enemies off guard much easier. They were also buffed in Season 3 Reloaded to improve hipfire spread while moving by 15% making them the clear best all-around option. It is no secret that grenades reign supreme in Modern Warfare 3 so consider using EOD Padding to reduce all non-killstreak explosive damage. This is especially important on small maps where grenade spam is extremely common like Das Haus and Shipment. Since you are most likely going to be playing slower than if you were using an AR or SMG, it’s important to cover your flanks. There is no better tool for this than the Proximity Mine, which will detonate when enemies run over it. Finally, a Stim is fantastic for healing up quickly and surviving situations where you would otherwise not have a chance. How to unlock DG-58 LSW in Modern Warfare 3 The DG-58 LSW is easy to unlock in MW3 as all you have to do is reach Level 7, This means you can unlock it in just a few matches but keep in mind there are an additional 29 gun levels which are required to use all of the DG-58 LSW’s unique attachments. Best DG-58 LSW alternative in Modern Warfare 3 Though another LMG can also work, the closest competitor to the DG-58 LSW is actually a hyper-accurate assault rifle like the MCW. Both of these weapons remain effective at extreme ranges making them perfect for big maps and large-scale game modes like Ground War. Be sure to check out these other MW3 loadouts for more alternatives to the DG-58 LSW: Bruen Mk9 loadout | Pulemyot 762 loadout | TAQ Eradicator loadout | TAQ Evolvere loadout

Best DG-56 loadout for MW3: Class setup, attachments, Perks & more The DG-56 is a great assault rifle in Modern Warfare 3 but its recoil can make it difficult to use, that is unless you use our meta loadout that transforms it into a top-tier MW3 weapon. The DG-56, previously called the DG-58, is an assault rifle very loosely based on the real-world QBZ-95. Alongside the FR 5.56, it is one of two burst rifles in MW3 and arguably the stronger of the pair. Though it dominated multiplayer when Modern Warfare 3 was first released, the DG-56 has since fallen out of favor. Even so, it is still a strong weapon that has a lot of value, especially if it’s built right. To help you create the best loadout possible, we’ve put together this optimized DG-56 which can dominate multiplayer lobbies in the right hands. Contents Best DG-56 loadout in Modern Warfare 3 – DG-56 MW3 loadout: Perks and equipment – How to unlock DG-56 – Best alternative to DG-56 – Best DG-56 loadout in Modern Warfare 3 Muzzle: T4LR Saber Compensator – Barrel: DG-56 LS18 Barrel – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Extended TP-9 Buttplate – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – By default, the DG-56 has a far-from-ideal recoil pattern which makes its burst highly inaccurate limiting its range. The biggest reason for this is its substantial horizontal recoil which can be fixed by equipping the T4LR Saber Compensator muzzle. To further improve recoil it is also recommended to use the Extended TP-9 Buttplate stock. With both of these attachments equipped the DG-56 is an incredibly accurate weapon that remains a threat from over 50 meters. However, to really make the DG-56 one of MW3’s most deadly long-range weapons you’ll need to run the DG-56 LS18 Barrel which boosts damage range, bullet velocity, recoil, and aiming idle stability. This pairs well with the Slate Reflector optic which is highly recommended on such a precision weapon. The only downside to these accuracy-focused attachments is that they slow down the DG-56 quite a lot. Even though it isn’t a weapon suited to a faster-paced playstyle by any means, it doesn’t hurt to use the DR-6 Handstop underbarrel to improve various handling and mobility stats. DG-56 MW3 loadout: Perks and equipment Vest: Overkill Vest – Gloves: Marksman Gloves – Boots: Stalker Boots – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – The DG-56 struggles at close range as its fire rate is somewhat slow and its hip-fire accuracy is far from ideal. For this reason, it’s good to use the Overkill Vest which enables the use of a second primary weapon better suited to close range like a meta SMG or shotgun. To get the most out of the DG-56’s strengths in MW3 use the Marksman Gloves and Stalker Boots. While the Marksman Gloves are not typically that useful on assault rifles, they benefit a burst weapon like the DG-56 more than most other ARs. Similarly, the Stalker Boots make more sense than usual here as this DG-56 build has surprisingly high ADS Movement Speed. Since we aren’t using a suppressor and have no stealth Perks, Bone Conduction Headset is a must. This Perk reduces player and environmental sounds making it much easier to hear nearby enemies which greatly increases awareness of your surroundings. For equipment, the classic combination of a Frag Grenade and Flash Grenade is always a solid setup with them offering both top-tier lethality and utility when its necessary. How to unlock DG-56 in Modern Warfare 3 The DG-56 can be unlocked through the Armory, first accessible at level 25. After unlocking the Armory, activate the DG-56 and either complete 3 Daily Challenges or win 3 multiplayer matches. Another option is to obtain and extract the assault rifle in Zombies to bypass the Armory altogether. Best alternative to DG-56 in Modern Warfare 3 Though the FR 5.56 is the obvious competitor with it being the only other burst assault rifle in MW3, we actually think the full auto MCW is a better alternative to the DG-56 as it offers comparable damage at long range. Be sure to check out our other Modern Warfare 3 content to stay ahead: Best MW3 Guns: Ultimate tier list | Best SVA 545 loadout | Best MTZ-556 loadout | Best MCW loadout | Best FR 5.56 loadout | Best Holger 556 loadout | Best RAM-7 loadout | Best BP50 loadout | Best WSP-9 loadout | Best MCW loadout | Best XRK Stalker loadout | Best RAM-9 loadout | Best BP50 loadout

Best DG-56 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks Viable burst guns, like the DG-56, are a versatile way to stay alive in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. For optimal performance, check out our concise guide for the best DG-56 loadout, featuring recommended attachments and Perks. Burst weapons have had a mixed history throughout Warzone with some having been excellent like Black Ops Cold War’s M16, but most failing to find their way into the meta. Inspired by the real-world QBZ-97, the DG-56 is a three-round burst assault rifle that looks to change this offering a strong option thanks to its impressive accuracy and competitive TTK. In saying that it isn’t the easiest gun to use and a suitable build is required to get the most out of it. That’s where we come in and provide a loadout that will let you dominate in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Best DG-56 Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: DG-58 LS18 Barrel – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 60 Round Drum – The goal with any burst weapon is to reduce recoil to make it more consistent and extend the effective damage range. Starting with range, the DG-56 LS18 Barrel and VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor combine well to not only improve the range but also reduce recoil and silence your weapon. As for recoil control, the Bruen Heavy Support Grip stock massively reduces Recoil Gun Kick, the most important stat on a burst gun. The best part is that the downsides to using this attachment are largely negligible. Just like any other Warzone rifle, having a bigger magazine is always useful and the DG-56’s 60 Round Drum offers just that. This extended magazine goes a long way on the DG-56 which is already ammo efficient due to it being burst-fire. Last, but certainly not least, is the Corio Eagleseye 2.5x optic which has emerged as a top-tier sight for assault rifles thanks to the low visual recoil and clear view it provides. DG-56 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix inserting a plate or killing another player will trigger health regeneration – – Perk 4: Resolute move faster when hit by an enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Double Time remains a meta option in Perk slot 1 as it not only doubles the duration of your tactical sprint but also reduces the refresh time letting you use it more often. This works well with Sleight of Hand, which lets you reload faster in a pinch and get back into the fight. Quick Fix makes health regeneration a breeze through triggering it when inserting an armor plate into your vest. Resolute is a powerful fourth slot Perk that increases your mobility even further through a movement speed boost when hit with enemy fire. You can’t go wrong with a Throwing Knife for the lethal slot as it can be thrown quickly and reliably down enemy players. Meanwhile, the best tactical is still a Smoke Grenade as the improvised cover it can provide is impactful and will regularly make a big difference. How to unlock DG-56 in Warzone The DG-56 is unlocked in Warzone through the armory, first accessible at level 25. After reaching the appropriate rank activate the DG-56 and complete 3 daily challenges. Alternatively, extracting with a DG-56 in Zombies will also unlock the assault rifle. Best alternative to DG-56 in Warzone Although it’s not a burst weapon, the Holger 556 competes directly against the DG-56 excelling in similar ranges offering a fantastic full-auto alternative. The DG-56 is just one of the solid mid-range options in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, so read up on other options like the Holger 556, BAL-27, and MCW.

Best Crossbow MW2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks The Crossbow is a unique primary weapon categorized as a Marksman Rifle. It might seem gimmicky but when built properly it can be surprisingly strong, especially in the right hands. Here’s the best Crossbow loadout in MW2 including attachments, Perks, and equipment. The Crossbow is an iconic weapon in Call of Duty having featured in several past installments. It debuted in the original Black Ops and has since appeared in Black Ops 2, Advanced Warfare, World War II, Modern Warfare (2019), and Black Ops Cold War. Introduced to MW2 in Season 2, the Crossbow is a Marksman Rifle that can secure one shot kills at any range. The catch is that the bolts it shoots travel slowly and therefore require players to lead their shots. Here’s the best loadout for the Crossbow in MW2, including the attachments, perks, and equipment to use. Contents Best Crossbow MW2 loadout – Crossbow MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the Crossbow in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the Crossbow in MW2 – Best Crossbow MW2 loadout Arms: SO Momenti (+0.22, +0.05) – Laser: 1MW Quick Fire Laser (+0.29, +0.00) – Optic: DF105 Reflex Sight – Wire: 28-Strand Cable (+6.00, -0.06) – Stock: Speedtrak Echo (+0.00, +2.40) – The Crossbow’s greatest flaw is that its fired bolts suffer from inaccuracy. This means that they won’t necessarily always go exactly where you aim which can be a huge problem with such an unforgiving fire rate. To remedy this it is highly recommended to use the SO Momenti arms and 28-Strand Cable wire. These combine to speed up the bolt’s velocity and make it more accurate, making the Crossbow less reliant on luck. With the bolt accuracy addressed we can now focus on speeding up the Crossbow. Using the 1MW Quick Fire Laser and Speedtrak Echo is a great way of improving ADS speed without any significant cons. Finally, a clear optic of choice is important as the Crossbow doesn’t have the best iron sights. We recommend the DF105 Reflex Sight but some other good options include the Cronen Mini Pro, Slimline Pro, and SZ Recharge-DX. Crossbow MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Battle Hardened – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Snapshot Grenade – Regardless of how you build the Crossbow, it isn’t going to be ideal for an aggressive playstyle. The Crossbow excels when playing more passive and controlling power positions that favor its effective range. To account for this we prioritize Perks that work best when playing defensively. The two best Base Perks for this are Battle Hardened and Bomb Squad which greatly weaken the effects of incoming enemy equipment. For Bonus Perk, Fast Hands is an absolute must as the Crossbow’s reload speed without it is painfully slow. On the Crossbow, this Perk speeds up reload speed by around 25% which is a huge improvement. As is the case for most weapons, Ghost is the best Ultimate Perk in MW2. It partners extremely well with the Crossbow as this Marksman Rifle doesn’t make you appear on the radar when fired. This opens up the opportunity for a stealth-oriented approach. The Proximity Mine is a fantastic choice for lethal equipment, letting you cut off lanes and punish overly aggressive players. Meanwhile, the Snapshot Grenade is perfect for scouting out an area before you run in. How to unlock the Crossbow in Modern Warfare 2 You can unlock the Crossbow by getting 50 Longshot Kills using Marksman Rifles in any MW2 multiplayer or Warzone game mode. Previously, the Crossbow was unlocked by completing the Path of the Ronin seasonal event during Season 2. Alternatives to Crossbow in MW2 Given the Crossbow’s unique characteristics, there isn’t necessarily a direct alternative. Even so, the SP-R 208 is another powerful but slow firing Marksman Rifle that is capable of securing one shot kills at any range. A less obvious option would be the Lockwood 300 shotgun equipped with Slug Rounds. It has a similar reliance on Fast Hands, infinite one shot kill potential, and requires precision to use effectively. That’s all for our Crossbow MW2 loadout! For more of our coverage, check out these guides below: All Modern Warfare 2 maps and game modes | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Cronen Squall Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Cronen Squall’s popularity exploded with its introduction in Season 3. The battle rifle’s raw firepower cemented it in the meta and it hasn’t left since. Here’s our best loadout for the Cronen Squall in Warzone 2, including the best attachments, perks, and equipment. On arrival, the Cronen Squall quickly established itself as the best weapon in Warzone 2. Its incredible TTK and fast fire rate made it a great choice in a wide range of situations. It became especially prevalent with the addition of Ranked Play seeing a lot of use with thermal optics, resulting in their eventual ban. Since then the Squall has seen numerous nerfs with the most recent arriving alongside Season 5. This latest nerf saw its maximum damage and damage multipliers decrease across the board. Even so, it remains a great weapon to use and is still one of the best all-around options to use. To get the most out of the Cronen Squall in Warzone 2 you’ll need a top-tier loadout, and thankfully we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Cronen Squall Warzone 2 loadout – Best Cronen Squall Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Cronen Squall in Warzone 2 – Best Cronen Squall alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Cronen Squall Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: TY-LR8 (+0.80, +0.32) – Barrel: HR6.8 Barrel (+0.39, +0.40) – Optic: Aim OP-V4 (+2.53, +0.00) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.80, -0.23) – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Our loadout focuses on mitigating the weapon’s significant recoil. When trying to use the Cronen Squall its recoil is the hardest part to deal with so prioritizing its improvement is a must. Without the right attachments, it is impractical to use this battle rifle at long range greatly limiting its potential. The most impactful attachment to do this is the TY-LR8, which helps horizontal recoil. It’s best to combine that with the FTAC Ripper which reduces Recoil Stabilization, minimizing how much unpredictable left-to-right bounce you have to deal with. The HR6.8 Barrel increases the Cronen’s effective range and bullet velocity to give you an edge in medium or long-range engagements. Next up, the Aim OP-V4 is a fantastic sight that doesn’t suffer from as much visual recoil as most other higher-zoom optics in Warzone 2. 30 bullets are plenty in Solos and Duos, but we recommend bumping that up to a 50 Round Drum for Trios and Quads. The extra rounds become even more important in Warzone 2 modes like resurgence where players will keep coming back over and over. Best Cronen Squall Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing knife – Tactical Equipment: Smoke grenade – Double Time makes it easier to traverse freely, improving the duration of your tactical sprint. We recommend using Overkill to pair the battle rifle with a meta short-range weapon such as the ISO 45 or Lachmann Sub. Resupply will come in handy over the duration of a long Warzone 2 match, as you start with an additional Lethal and equipment recharges over 30 seconds. Finally, High Alert may save your life on one or two occasions, as vision pulses alert you when an enemy spots you. To round off the setup, we recommend using throwing knives to finish off downed enemies or take down multiple enemies at once without wasting ammo. And finally, smoke grenades are great for fleeing a gunfight or rotating in the final few circles. How to unlock the Cronen Squall in Warzone 2 The Cronen Squall is unlocked by completing the following in-game challenge: “Get 30 Headshot Operator Kills with Battle Rifles.” Alternatively, it will automatically unlock if you managed to successfully extract with any Squall blueprint in a DMZ game. When it was first added the Cronen Squall Battle Rifle was instead unlocked by completing Sector C11 of the Season 3 Battle Pass. Best Cronen Squall alternatives in Warzone 2 If the Cronen Squall’s TTK doesn’t impress you in the same way it used to, but you still want a powerful fully automatic weapon, look no further than the TAQ V. The battle rifle provides a TTK that leads every other long-range meta weapon. Alternatively, those that prefer the Squall’s semi-auto fire can consider using the Lachmann-762 which has a tremendous TTK assuming you can handle its difficult recoil. That’s all for our Cronen Squall loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Cronen Squall Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionSeason 3 introduction of Cronen Squall into MW2’s multiplayer brings some hope for the battle rifle category. It’s firepower and automatic capability cemented it in the current meta. Here’s our top-tier loadout for Modern Warfare 2‘s Cronen Squall, including the best attachments, perks, and equipment. The Battle Rifle category of weapons in Modern Warfare 2 is collecting dust, as the second most popular gun at the time of writing is TAQ-V with an abysmal 0,4% pick rate. Thankfully the Cronen Squall swooped in at the start of Season 3 and instantly became the 6th most popular gun of the corresponding week. The hard-hitting Cronen Squall battle rifle offers a large 30-round mag by default, combined with a full automatic capability the Squall feels like a slightly bulkier, heavier-hitting AR. Furthermore, Cronen Squall performs great at close, medium, AND long range, making it a great tool for a variety of situations. That is if you manage to get its kickback under control. Fortunately for you, we have the perfect Cronen Squall loadout to help you carry your team to victory. Contents Best Cronen Squall Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Cronen Squall Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Cronen Squall in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Cronen Squall alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Cronen Squall Modern Warfare 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Sakin Thread-40 – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Barrel: HR6.8 Barrel – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Our loadout focuses on mitigating the weapon’s significant recoil. Sakin Thread-40 helps with both the horizontal and vertical recoil of Cronen Squall, and then the FTAC Ripper helps with Hip Fire Accuracy and Recoil Stabilization to help you with both medium and short-range exchanges. The HR6.8 Barrel increases Cronen’s damage range and bullet velocity to give you an edge in medium or long-range engagements for the maps that offer longer lines of sight. Next up, the Cronen Mini Pro gives you an optic that makes locking onto targets a bit easier. The FSS OLE-V Laser further helps you with recoil and stability to increase your changes in those “first to the draw” engagements at medium ranges. Best Cronen Squall Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – Having Overkill is a great way to cover your weakness. Bring an SMG or a Shotgun if you find yourself losing battles up close. Next, Double Time allows you to tactical sprint longer, allowing you to reposition in-between firefights or to make a mad dash to the objective. On top of that, Fast Hands ensures you are less likely to get caught while reloading or using the equipment. Finally, the Ultimate Perk, High Alert, notifies you when someone is aiming at you from outside of your field of view. We round off the setup with the Drill Charge for taking down shields and clearing out rooms. Then slap a Smoke Grenade on top of that for breaking the line of sight and hiding from enemies that hold the advantage over you. How to unlock the Cronen Squall in Modern Warfare 2 The Cronen Squall Battle Rifle is unlocked by completing Sector C11 of the Season 3 Battle Pass. Luckily, this is one of the free Sectors of the new Black Cell Battle Pass, so can get hold of the gun without purchasing the premium option. Best Cronen Squall alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 If the Cronen Squall is a tad too bulky for your liking, but you still want a powerful fully automatic weapon, look no further than the TAQ-56. The AR provides a mobile and nimble version of the hard-hitting SCAR. It’s perfect for laser-beaming foes from afar, especially if you kit out the weapon for maximum stability. That’s all for our Cronen Squall loadout! For more of our Modern Warfare 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate ti

Best COR-45 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks, & more The COR-45 is an exceptional pistol for close-range gunfights, and after the Modern Warfare 3 integration, it emerged as one of the ultimate sidearms in the game. Here’s the best COR-45 loadout in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded to reign supreme in those close-quarter battles In its base form, the COR-45 is based on the real-world Glock 21. Much like its real-life counterpart, it is a fast-firing yet accurate pistol that excels up close. In Warzone and MW3, the COR-45 comes into its own with a unique Aftermarket Part inspired by various third-party options on the market. This unusual configuration turns the handgun into something truly special. With that said, here’s everything you need to know about using the COR-45 in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, and its remarkable Aftermarket Part. Best COR-45 Warzone loadout Stock: XRK Dynamic Precision Stock – Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 40 Round Drum – Conversion Kit: XRK IP-V2 Conversion Kit – The focal point of this build is the XRK IP-V2 Conversion Kit which gives the COR-45 a binary trigger. That means it functions as a semi-auto weapon that fires both when you pull the trigger and when you release it making it much easier to reach its theoretical fire cap of 800 RPM resulting in an incredible TTK. A downside of this conversion kit is that the COR-45 can be difficult to control with it equipped making recoil control a priority. The best attachments to improve recoil are the ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider and XRK Dynamic Precision Stock. One of the benefits of using a pistol like the COR-45 is its mobility, which will be further enhanced by the DR-6 Handstop. Finally, the 40 Round Drum greatly improves magazine size which is a must to down more players before reloading. COR-45 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Faster reloading – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. Health regeneration will not trigger while in the gas. – – Perk 4: Resolute Move faster when hit by an enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Flash Grenade – With the COR-45 being such a mobile weapon it’s a good idea to use Double Time to get around the map faster. This is also why we use Resolute in the slot for Perk 4. Quick Fix is a solid choice on any close-range weapon as it lets you trigger healing instantly by using an armor plate. This is ideal for quickly recovering amid a tense fight and gaining the edge over your opposition who will still be low on health. For the last Perk, Sleight of Hand lends itself well to a run-and-gun playstyle, allowing you to reload in a heartbeat to get back to the fight and hold your own. A Throwing Knife is a classic choice in the lethal slot with it being perfect for quickly downing an enemy once you’ve taken out their shields. Finally, a Flash Grenade is a powerful tool in a gunfight as it can be used to blind enemies and then rush in for easy kills. How to unlock COR-45 in Warzone The COR-45 is an early unlock with it being accessible in the gunsmith after reaching level 4. Alternatively, you can extract it in Zombies to instantly unlock the weapon. How to unlock XRK IP-V2 Aftermarket Part in Warzone There are two methods to unlock the XRK IP-V2 Aftermarket Part: Activate the Armory Unlock and complete three daily Daily Challenges – Reach level 22, aka the max level, with the COR-45 and get 25 kills with a Silencer attached – Best alternative to COR-45 in Warzone Given its unique binary trigger, there isn’t an obvious comparison to the COR-45, but a meta SMG like the WSP Swarm is another option that excels up close while struggling at medium range. There are a ton of close-quarter weapons to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, so learn more about the FJX Horus, Striker, AMR9, and Superi 46.

Best COR-45 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionMW3 community members are sleeping on pistols, but we are here to enlighten you about the underrated COR-45. From class setup to attachments, and perks, here is everything you need to know. There is something oddly satisfying about using a pistol in Call of Duty. When a sidearm is powerful enough, you feel like James Bond or Agent 47 whipping around the map and popping heads. The problem is that pistols usually aren’t strong enough to compete with top-tier meta weapons. It also doesn’t help that MW3 features a whopping 114 weapons at launch. With so many other options out there, a pistol probably ranks near last in a list of most exciting weapons. But that is where you might be wrong. Even though sidearms don’t necessarily jump off the page as must-use weapons, the COR 45 is absolutely lethal in the right hands and with the right set of attachments equipped. Contents Best COR-45 loadout – COR-45 MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the COR-45 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best COR-45 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best COR-45 loadout Laser: FJX DIOD-70 – Stock: XRK Dynamic Precision Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Conversion Kit: XRK IP-V2 Conversion Kit – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – The core of this loadout is the XRK IP-V2 Conversion Kit as it allows you to equip underbarrel and optic attachments to the weapon, which will help greatly. Using this, you can have the DR-6 Handstop to help with your mobility and weapon handling. Using the XRK Dynamic Precision Stock gives you better recoil control to make the COR 45 nearly recoilless and able to hit many shots in a row. The FJX DIOD-70 laser helps boost the gun’s ADS, aiming stability, and sprint-to-fire speed. Finally, the 40 Round Mag offers a lot more shots that can be fired in one clip, meaning that you can hit multiple enemies in one scenario. COR-45 MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment Modern Warfare 3 removes the traditional perk system in favor of using gear. Check out our full guide if you need an explainer of what each gear item does. Players will want to use perks that conceal their own movement, while also knowing what’s going around them at all times. Vest: Infantry Vest increases the length of your Tac Sprint – – Gloves: Commando Gloves lets you reload while sprinting – – Boots Stalker Boots move faster when strafing or aiming down sights – – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset improves combat audio so you can hear enemy footsteps and gunfire – – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Battle Rage – This loadout’s Perks are designed to bring your mobility to the top, specifically using Infantry Vest and Stalker Boots that will each improve your movement speed in some way. The Commando Gloves ensure that you will never have to stop and reload, keeping you on the move at all times. Finally, the Bone Conduction Headset is going to help keep you aware of your surroundings at all times. How to unlock the COR-45 in Modern Warfare 3 The COR-45 is one of the base weapons available in Modern Warfare 3. As such, there are no requirements to unlock the COR-45. Best COR-45 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 If the COR-45 doesn’t check every box for what a sidearm should be. The next best option would most likely be the Renetti as there is a new Aftermarket Part that transforms the pistol into a pocket SMG. That’s all for our COR-45 loadout in MW3. For more MW3 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes

Best Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best Cooper Carbine loadout in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded is top-tier in the current meta and continues to dominate foes on Caldera. Vanguard’s Cooper Carbine can be a great close-quarters or long-range option in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded, depending on which build you decide to kit it out with. This lightning-fast AR has a lethal TTK, which makes it a brilliant sniper support when customized properly – or a laser beam at range if you equip attachments that can bolster the weapon’s recoil. In order to get the most out of one of the game’s most popular ARs, we’ve put together the best Cooper Carbine loadout you should be using in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded. Remember, if you’re ready to dive into Warzone 2 and want to know which top-tier weapons to use, be sure to check out our list of the best meta weapons and loadouts to use in Warzone 2. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here. Contents Best Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout – Best Cooper Carbine setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Cooper Carbine in Warzone – Best Cooper Carbine loadout Warzone tips – Alternatives to Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout – Best Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: 22” Cooper Custom – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Cooper 45RS – Underbarrel: m1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 9mm 60 Round Drums – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Tight Grip – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – The best Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout boosts the gun’s fire rate and accuracy, which allows it to compete against the very best weapons in the game. First up is the MX Silencer, which helps keep the recoil in check, at the cost of some damage. Don’t worry though, the 22″ Cooper Custom barrel balances things out by upping the damage again. To allow the Cooper Carbine to perform at long range, we’ve utilized attachments that greatly improve its accuracy and the fire rate to get more bang for your buck. The Cooper 45RS, m1941 Hand Stop, and Polymer Grip all help make the Cooper Carbine as sharp as possible. Next up are the 9mm 60 Rnd Drums and Lengthened Rounds. The magazine features increased recoil control, fire rate, ADS speed, and plenty of ammo to down multiple enemies. Meanwhile, the ammo type simply bolsters the Cooper Carbine’s bullet velocity turning it into more of a frying laser. Combine these attachments with the Fully Loaded and Tight Grip perks, and you have a recipe for an incredibly lethal loadout. Best Cooper Carbine setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Armaguerra 43 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – Our Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout utilizes all the standard meta perks. Both E.O.D and Amped keep you safe from any explosive blasts, while also giving increased speed when swapping to your secondary weapon, which we’ll touch on soon. Overkill also enables you to carry another primary weapon of your choice and this is incredibly important considering this loadout is tailored around long-range firefights. So we recommend taking a close-range SMG or Shotgun, like the Gallo, to help with close-quarter engagements. The Armaguerra 43, H4 Blixen, and MP40 are strong options in the current meta. Lastly, both the Semtex and Stim will give you the tools needed to flush out pesky campers and the ability to quickly heal yourself when you take damage or even use it as a clever way to evade the clutches of the deadly gas. How to unlock the Cooper Carbine in Warzone In order to unlock the Cooper Carbine in CoD Warzone, you need to get 5 headshot kills with an AR in a single match 15 times. The Cooper Carbine was originally unlocked through the Vanguard and Warzone Season 1 Battle Pass. The best way to complete this challenge is by jumping into multiplayer where it’s easier to rack up more kills, but it’s still possible to unlock the weapon in Warzone matches, it just may take slightly longer. Just make sure that once you’ve satisfied the conditions, see the match through to ensure it counts! Best Cooper Carbine loadout Warzone tips The Cooper Carbine comes equipped with an insanely fast fire rate, making it extremely effective at long range. Our loadout simply aims to accentuate its already existing strengths. If you wish to get more kills while using this weapon, then here are some tips you should be utilizing in-game: This loadout is geared around being fast and aggressive, so once you’ve got this class in your loadout drop, be sure to secure another drop to get the Ghost perk. This will allow you to flank and be aggressive while going unrecognized by enemy UAVs and Heartbeat Sensors. – Finally, pair this weapon with Sniper Rifle if you wish to be effective at all ranges. The Cooper Carbine can hold its own at range, but even the best Assault Rifles are useless when the distance between you and your target becomes too large. Using the Gorenko, AX-50, ZRG 20mm or 3-Line Rifle will make this a well-rounded loadout. – Alternatives to Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout The MP40 is a powerful SMG in Season 5 Reloaded and has made a resurgence thanks to its high rate of fire, great damage, and fantastic hip-fire accuracy. However, to maximize its potential it’s essential you utilize the correct attachments and luckily, we’ve got the best loadout for the weapon right here. If that’s not your cup of tea, then it could be worth your time to give the rejuvenated XM4 or the M4A1, which is currently sitting as the most popular Modern Warfare weapon in the game. So, there you have it, the best Cooper Carbine loadout that can give you a competitive edge in Warzone. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone landing spots on Caldera map

Best Cooper Carbine Vanguard loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Activision/Sledgehammer GamesThe best CoD Vanguard Cooper Carbine loadout comes packed with high damage and great accuracy, making it an exceptionally deadly pick in Season 3. CoD Vanguard is filled with powerful Assault Rifles, but the Cooper Carbine came in and made a name for itself in the Season 3 update. This lightning-fast AR can pump bullets out at incredible speeds, which makes it a great pick for those looking to rival the game’s best SMG loadouts. Those that enjoy the run and gun playstyle of Vanguard’s SMG class will love the Cooper Carbine. When kitted out with the attachments outlined below, the Cooper Carbine becomes an absolute monster. Whether it has what it takes to become Vanguard’s best AR remains to be seen, but this loadout will certainly net you plenty of kills. Contents Best Cooper Carbine Vanguard loadout – Best Cooper Carbine class loadout (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the Cooper Carbine in Vanguard – Alternatives to Cooper Carbine Vanguard loadout – Best Cooper Carbine Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: 22″ Cooper Custom – Stock: Cooper 45RS – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: .30 Carbine 45 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Hollow Point – Rear Grip: Pine Tar Grip – Proficiency: Vital – Kit: Fully Loaded – The best Cooper Carbine loadout boosts the gun’s firepower, accuracy, and ammo. First up is the Recoil Booster and 22″ Cooper Custom barrel. Both these attachments increase the AR’s fire rate and also make it incredibly accurate. In fact, this gun is an absolute laser. This is particularly true when you kit it out with the Cooper 45RS, Carver Foregrip, and Pine Tar Grip. All three of these attachments completely negate the Cooper Carbine’s recoil, which enables you to effortlessly beam down your foes without needing to wrestle for control. Next up is the .30 Carbine 45 Round Mags. This smaller magazine is faster to reload, increases bullet velocity, provides penetration, and enhances the Cooper Carbine’s damage. Fully Loaded also ensures you have the maximum amount of starting ammo, so you’ll be able to go on game-winning streaks without having to constantly switch out weapons. If the Cooper’s damage wasn’t high enough, then the addition of Hollow Point rounds and Vital proficiency bolsters this area even further. After all, dealing more damage to enemy limbs and having increased critical hit areas is always beneficial to any meta loadout. Best Cooper Carbine Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Forward Intel – Perk 3: Demolition – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – The best Cooper Carbine loadout uses Ghost, Forward Intel, and Demolition as its perk choices. Ghost keeps you hidden from Spy Planes and enemy equipment, which enables you to flank your foes and beam them down before they can even react. Next up is Forward Intel. This perk is arguably the most powerful in the game as it enables you to instantly gain knowledge on enemy locations without running any reconnaissance killstreaks. Being able to see enemy spawn rotations and avoid any backstabs is extremely useful. Demolition is our last perk choice as it enables you to bring two Lethals. Having access to more MK2 Frag Grenades is always nice, particularly when you need to flush out pesky campers. While the Cooper Carbine comes packed with plenty of ammo, we’ve utilized the Machine Pistol as a secondary. This deadly pistol comes packed with a high rate of fire and great accuracy. Whether you find yourself running low on ammo or just need to quickly finish off a low health foe, then the Machine Pistol is the tool for the job. Lastly, both the Stim and Armor maximize your survivability, enabling you to turn the tide of even the fiercest of firefights. How to unlock the Cooper Carbine in Vanguard In order to unlock the Cooper Carbine in CoD Vanguard, you’ll need to complete the following objective: “Using Assault Rifles, get 5 or more headshots in 15 different completed matches.” Just so that you are aware if you aren’t already, once you’ve got your five headshots you must finish the match for it to count. Doing so will not register and you’ll have to do another lot of five. Alternatives to Cooper Carbine Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the Cooper Carbine, then check out our Automaton loadout. While this full-auto AR may not have a high rate of fire, it is capable of melting enemies across all engagement ranges. The Automaton’s fantastic damage range and accuracy make it a great pick for those that prefer highly versatile options. Make sure to give our Automaton loadout a go and begin leveling it up for upcoming integration. So, there you have it, the best Cooper Carbine loadout that can melt foes in Vanguard Season 3. Make sure you check out our other Vanguard loadout guides to get a competitive edge over your foes: Best Gorenko loadout | Best SVT-40 loadout | Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout | Best DP27 loadout | Best Type 11 loadout | Best Bren loadout | Best 3-Line Rifle loadout Best NZ-41 | Best Einhorn Revolving | Best BAR loadout | Best M1 Garand loadout | Best Volkssturmgewehr

Best controller settings in MW3: Aim assist, sensitivity, deadzones, more DexertoHaving the best controller settings possible is crucial for adapting to MW3’s fast-paced movement and gameplay in this year’s game. Fine-tuning your settings is an almost never-ending task for Call of Duty players. You’ll alter your sensitivity slightly, play with different aim assist settings, and adjust your deadzones to find the sweet spot, but soon enough you’ll feel the need to change things up again. While this process can get tedious, it is essential, as not having optimal controller settings can jeopardize your gameplay. The tricky bit is figuring out which settings you should use, with that task getting increasingly difficult as Sledgehammer Games adds more options in every update. Taking a look at how many of the top pros and streamers set up their controller, and assessing all of the options available in-game, here are the best MW3 controller settings to use, including aim assist, sensitivity, and deadzones How to change controller settings Changing your controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 is an easy enough task. All you need to do to access the appropriate menu is follow these instructions: Launch either Modern Warfare 3 or Call of Duty HQ on your platform of choice. – Once on the main menu, press start. – Use either RB or R1 to change to the settings tab, represented by a white cog. – Finally, click ‘Controller’ to access controller settings. – Best Controller settings Deadzones First things first, you’ll want to adjust your deadzones. Modern Warfare 3 introduced a feature that allows players to test if their controller has stick drift. The Deadzone Input Test shows a diagram of both the left and right sticks plus both triggers. All four can be tweaked to account for stick drift and overly sensitive triggers. Decreasing the Deadzones as low as possible results in the best possible precision aim. However, you may need to increase the Left and Right Stick Min if you experience stick drift. Your Stick Min settings should match your stick drift percentage seen on the test diagram. For example, if you have 2% stick drift on either axis, then Left and Right Stick Min should be set to at least 2. However, a slightly higher value is recommended as stick drift will vary slightly as you play. For most players, 5 on both sticks and triggers will work great. Inputs Best Aiming settings Aiming Aim Assist Motion Sensor Aiming Best Gameplay settings Movement Behaviors Combat Behaviors Vehicle Behaviors Overlays Behavior Best Aim Assist settings While playing on a controller, it is always essential to ensure Target Aim Assist is On. Besides just making sure that Aim Assist is on, players also must consider the different Aim Assist Types. Default: Traditional aim slowdown near target used in Modern Warfare games. – Precision: Strong aim slowdown that only kicks in when aiming closer to the target. Recommended for accurate players. – Focusing: Strong aim slowdown that also kicks in when narrowly missing the target. Recommended for players new to analog aiming. – Black Ops: Traditional aim slowdown near target used in Black Ops games – We recommend using the Default Aim Assist Type. While Black Ops Aim Assist was particularly popular in MW2 and in the early days of MW3, changes to aim assist now mean that Default is the best aim assist to use. Best Aim Response Curve Modern Warfare 3 offers three types of Aim Response Curves, each coming with its own distinct feeling for your thumbstick movements. Here are how the three types work: Standard: Simple power curve map from aim stick to aim rate – Linear: Aim stick maps directly to aim rate – Dynamic: Reverse S-curve mapping for fine aim rate control – Most MW3 players will lean towards the Standard Aim Response Curve, but we recommend giving Dynamic a go and learning how to use it. The setting allows for much finer control than the other options but requires a bit of a learning curve, no pun intended. At the end of the day, controller settings come down to personal preference, so if one or more of our settings don’t quite seem to work for you, then it’s easy enough to find your own specialized adjustments. Load up a Private Match with bots and tinker around with the settings until everything feels exactly as it should — and make sure to check out our best Warzone controller settings if you want to drop into the COD battle royale mode.